CXR-QX3440

Access DCS-MUX

User’s Manual

CXR ANDERSON JACOBSON

Sales, Research & Development, Manufacturing :

Rue de l'Ornette - 28410 Abondant FRANCE

Tel: +33 237.62.88.00 – Fax: +33 237.62.88.01
WEB Site: http://www.cxr.com
Support: [email protected]
Tel: +33 237.62.88.04

Part Number : 8000 602 036 Indice: 14

Version 103
 2016 CXR. All rights reserved.
Version 103 22 August, 2016
 Disclaimers

I. Manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the
use of this manual.

II. Manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties that
may arise through the use of this product.

III. Manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by

incorrect use of this product.

IV. The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice due to
engineering improvements.

V. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written
consent of the Manufacturer.

VI. Sample displays shown in this manual may differ from the actual displays.

VII. Information in this manual may differ from software information due to firmware
changes.

VIII. All brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
 CAUTION:

 Only qualified service personnel shall install and maintain the system.
 This equipment must be connected to an earth socket-outlet, which has a permanent
connection to protective earth with a cross-sectional area of not less than 2.5 mm2.
 Ensure protective earthing is connected before installing/uninstalling telephone wires.
 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
 Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet
locations.
 Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
 Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

Précautions :

 Seul le personnel qualifié peut installer et entretenir le matériel.

 L’équipement doit être connecté à la prise de terre, qui doit avoir une connexion permanente
à la terre de protection avec une section de fil supérieure à 2.5 mm2.
 S’assurer que la terre de protection est branché lors de l’installation ou désinstallation des
fils téléphoniques.
 Ne jamais installer les fils du téléphone pendant un orage.
 Ne jamais installer la prise téléphonique dans un endroit humide sans prendre la précaution
que cette prise téléphonique soit prévu pour un environnement humide.
 Ne jamais toucher les fils téléphoniques dénudés sans que la prise téléphonique soit
débranché du réseau.
 Prendre toutes les précautions d'usages pendant l'installation ou les modifications de la
ligne téléphonique.
Note: The QX3440 User’s Manual is available in different volumes

Main Chassis (QX3440 Access DCS-MUX USER'S MANUAL)

LCD Manual (only cover selected plug-in module)
12/24-FXSFXO Manual
1DTE Manual
1FOM Manual
1FOMA Manual
3E1 Manual
4E1/T1 Manual
4E&M Manual
4FXSFXO Manual
8E&M Manual
8RS232 Manual
8UDTEA Manual
Conference Manual
Co-directional (G.703) Manual
6CDA Manual
Data Bridge Manual
Dry Contact/Dry Contact-B Manual
FOM Manual
G.703 (Co-direction) Manual
G.SHDSL Manual
Low Speed Optical (C37.94) Manual
Mini 4T1/E1 (M4TE) Manual
Mini Low Speed Optical (C37.94) Manual
Mini Quad E1 Manual
Magneto Manual
OCU-DP Manual
QEMA Manual
QFXSA Manual
Router Manual
Router-A Manual
Router-B Manual
Single E1/T1 Manual
TDMoE Card
Terminal Server Manual
Transfer Trip (TTA) Manual
U-interface Manual (Discontinued)

Please refer to the manual that meets your specific needs.

 Table of Contents
1 Product Description .................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Function Description ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Physical Description ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Application ........................................................................................................................................ 2
1.4 Specifications for QX3440 ................................................................................................................ 3

2 Installation ............................................................................................................... 17
2.1 Site Selection .................................................................................................................................. 17
2.2 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................................................... 17
2.3 Electrical Installation ....................................................................................................................... 17
2.3.1 Chassis Grounding ................................................................................................................. 18
2.3.2 Electrical Installation Guide .................................................................................................... 19
2.3.3 Fan Tray Setting ..................................................................................................................... 22
2.3.4 Alarm Relay ............................................................................................................................ 23
2.3.5 Fuse Relay .............................................................................................................................. 24
2.3.6 Line Power Option .................................................................................................................. 25
2.4 Card Installation .............................................................................................................................. 26
2.4.1 Controller Card Installation ..................................................................................................... 26
2.4.2 Plug-in Card Installation ......................................................................................................... 26
2.4.3 Card Replacement .................................................................................................................. 27
2.4.3.1. Install the New Controller Card ..................................................................................... 27
2.4.3.2. Dual-CTRL protection ................................................................................................... 27
2.4.3.3. Install the New Plug-in Card ......................................................................................... 28
2.4.4 Card Removal ......................................................................................................................... 29
2.5 Configuration Setting ...................................................................................................................... 30
2.5.1 Software Configuration Setting ............................................................................................... 30

3 Operation ................................................................................................................. 31
3.1 Quick Start for QX3440................................................................................................................... 31
3.1.1 Power On ................................................................................................................................ 31
3.1.2 Load Default ........................................................................................................................... 31
3.1.3 Using Front Panel ................................................................................................................... 31
3.1.3.1. Review of Default Settings............................................................................................ 31
3.1.3.2. Map Setup..................................................................................................................... 31
3.1.3.3. DS1 ............................................................................................................................... 32
3.1.3.4. Unit Selection ................................................................................................................ 32
3.1.4 Using Terminal ........................................................................................................................ 32
3.1.5 Configuration Settings ............................................................................................................ 32
3.2 System Operation ........................................................................................................................... 32
3.2.1 Date ........................................................................................................................................ 32
3.2.2 Master Clock ........................................................................................................................... 32
3.2.3 Console Port ........................................................................................................................... 32
3.2.4 Menu Lock .............................................................................................................................. 33
3.2.5 Logon, Logoff, and Password ................................................................................................. 33
3.3 Alarms and Reports ........................................................................................................................ 33
3.3.1 Alarms ..................................................................................................................................... 33
3.3.2 Reports ................................................................................................................................... 35
3.4 LED Operation ................................................................................................................................ 37
3.5 Telnet Connectivity ......................................................................................................................... 37
3.6 Embedded SNMP Agent................................................................................................................. 38
3.7 In-Band Management Setup ........................................................................................................... 38

4 Maintenance............................................................................................................. 40
 4.1 Self-Test.......................................................................................................................................... 40
4.2 Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................................... 40
4.3 Near End Loopback ........................................................................................................................ 40
4.4 Far End Loopback .......................................................................................................................... 40
4.5 Test Pattern .................................................................................................................................... 40
4.6 Verifying QX3440 Operations ......................................................................................................... 40
4.6.1 Quick Test ............................................................................................................................... 41
4.6.1.1. LCD/Display .................................................................................................................. 41
4.6.1.2. Independent Test .......................................................................................................... 41
4.6.2 Substitution ............................................................................................................................. 41
4.6.3 Using Loopback Plugs ............................................................................................................ 41
4.6.4 Using Bert Test Set ................................................................................................................. 41

5 Front Panel Operation ............................................................................................. 42

5.1 Refer to QX3440 LCD separate Manual......................................................................................... 42

6 Terminal Operation .................................................................................................. 43

6.1 Menu Tree ...................................................................................................................................... 44
6.2 Main Menu ...................................................................................................................................... 45
6.2.1 System Configuration ............................................................................................................. 46
6.2.1.1. System .......................................................................................................................... 46
6.2.1.2. Clock Source ................................................................................................................ 47
6.2.1.3. TSI Map ........................................................................................................................ 50
6.2.1.4. Current TSI Map ........................................................................................................... 51
6.2.1.5. Power/Fan Status ......................................................................................................... 53
6.2.1.6. Link backup function ..................................................................................................... 54
6.2.1.7. QDS1 1:1 protection ..................................................................................................... 54
6.2.1.8. DS0-SNCP Status ........................................................................................................ 55
6.2.1.9. Inband Protection Status .............................................................................................. 55
6.2.1.10. Activation Status ........................................................................................................... 55
Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (S)> Activation Status ........................................ 55
6.2.2 Clock Source Configuration .................................................................................................... 56
6.2.3 Alarm Queue Summary .......................................................................................................... 57
6.2.4 Information Summary ............................................................................................................. 58
6.2.5 Redundant CTRL Information ................................................................................................. 59
6.2.6 Performance Report ............................................................................................................... 59
6.2.7 System Setup ......................................................................................................................... 60
6.2.7.1. System .......................................................................................................................... 61
6.2.7.2. SNMP............................................................................................................................ 63
6.2.7.3. Password ...................................................................................................................... 68
6.2.7.4. TELNET/SSH Setup ..................................................................................................... 68
6.2.7.5. Init Init/Clear .................................................................................................................. 69
6.2.7.6. TSI Map Setup .............................................................................................................. 70
6.2.7.7. Select a New TSI Map .................................................................................................. 71
6.2.7.8. Copy a TSI Map to another........................................................................................... 71
6.2.7.9. Clear a TSI Map ............................................................................................................ 72
6.2.7.10. Signaling Convert Table ............................................................................................... 72
6.2.7.11. Link back up .................................................................................................................. 72
6.2.7.12. QDS1 1:1 Protection ..................................................................................................... 72
6.2.7.13. DS0-SNCP Setup ......................................................................................................... 73
6.2.7.14. PDH Ring Protection ..................................................................................................... 73
6.2.7.15. PDH Ring Diagnostic .................................................................................................... 74
6.2.7.16. Inband Protection .......................................................................................................... 75
6.2.7.17. Command Line ............................................................................................................. 77
6.2.7.18. SNTP Setup .................................................................................................................. 79
6.2.7.19. SYSLOG Setup ............................................................................................................. 79
6.2.7.20. Power Setup ................................................................................................................. 79
6.2.7.21. RADIUS Setup .............................................................................................................. 80
6.2.7.22. Multicast Mapping Procedure ....................................................................................... 80
 6.2.8 System Alarm Setup ............................................................................................................... 83
6.2.9 Firmware Transfer ................................................................................................................... 85
6.2.9.1. Download Mainboard Firmware .................................................................................... 85
6.2.9.2. Application of upload / download configuration ............................................................ 86
6.2.9.3. Copy Firmware to Redundant ....................................................................................... 87
6.2.9.4. Download Firmware Procedure .................................................................................... 87
6.2.9.5. Controller (CTRL) Firmware Synchronization ............................................................... 91
6.2.10 Store/ Retrieve Configuration ................................................................................................. 92
6.2.11 Clock Mode Setup .................................................................................................................. 94
6.2.12 Clock Source Setup ................................................................................................................ 94
6.2.13 Bit Error Rate Test ................................................................................................................ 100
6.2.14 Alarm Cut Off ........................................................................................................................ 101
6.2.15 Clear Alarm Queue ............................................................................................................... 101
6.2.16 Return to Default................................................................................................................... 102
6.2.17 Controller Reset .................................................................................................................... 102

7 Appendix A: Link Backup Function ..................................................................... 103

7.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 103
7.2 Physical Requirement ................................................................................................................... 104
7.3 Setup Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 104

8 Appendix B: Inband Management ........................................................................ 106

8.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 106
8.2 Inband Management Setup Procedure ......................................................................................... 107

9 Appendix C: QDS1 1:1 Protection .........................................................................111

9.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 111
9.2 Setting up Circuit Protection ......................................................................................................... 111
9.2.1 Connecting the Y-Box to the QX3440 Shelf ..........................................................................111
9.2.2 Quad E1 card Location ......................................................................................................... 113
9.2.3 Setting up a VT-100 Monitor ................................................................................................. 113
9.2.4 Step by Step Quad E1 Plug-in card Circuit Protection Setup .............................................. 113
9.3 Setting up Line Protection............................................................................................................. 115
9.3.1 Step by Step Quad E1 Card Line Protection Setup ............................................................. 115

10 Appendix D: QX3440 Alarm Trap Information ..................................................... 117

10.1 Trap definition ............................................................................................................................... 117
10.2 ccAlarmModel: Plug-in card model type ...................................................................................... 118
10.3 ccAlarmSlot: Slot index ................................................................................................................ 119
10.4 ccAlarmPort: Port index ............................................................................................................... 119
10.5 ccAlarmType < 20: Controller alarm ............................................................................................ 119
10.6 ccAlarmType: Unit alarm ............................................................................................................. 120
10.7 Alarm Setup Indication.................................................................................................................. 125

11 Appendix E: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring .................... 126

11.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 126
11.2 Setup Instructions ......................................................................................................................... 127

12 Appendix F: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring (T1) ............. 132
12.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 132
12.2 Setup Instructions ......................................................................................................................... 133

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup ............................. 137

13.1 Physical Requirements ................................................................................................................. 137
13.2 Setup Procedures ......................................................................................................................... 139
14 Appendix H: QX3440 Power Consumption ......................................................... 150

15 Appendix I: FAE Package ..................................................................................... 154

15.1 FAE Support .................................................................................................................................... 154
15.2 Activate iXC/8UDTE/PDH Ring .................................................................................................... 155

List of Figures
Figure 1-1 QX3440 Application Illustration (1 of 2) ............................................................................................ 2
Figure 1-2 QX3440 with Y-BOX (2 of 2) ............................................................................................................. 2
Figure 2-1 Ground Screw Location ...................................................................................................................18
Figure 2-2 DC Power Without Grounding Application ......................................................................................19
Figure 2-3 Panel Views - Main Shelf and Controller Card................................................................................20
Figure 2-4 Panel Views (for 1/2 slot) - Power Modules ....................................................................................21
Figure 2-5 Front Panel View - Fan Tray ...........................................................................................................22
Figure 2-6 Rear Panel View - Fan Tray ............................................................................................................22
Figure 2-7 Top View - Fan Tray........................................................................................................................23
Figure 3-1 HDLC using E1 router .....................................................................................................................38
Figure 6-1 QX3440 Controller: Menu Tree .....................................................................................................44
Figure 8-1 Inband Management Diagram .......................................................................................................106
Figure 9-1 Connection for QX3440 and Y-BOX with BNC connectors ..........................................................112
Figure 9-2 Connection for QX3440 and Y-BOX with RJ48C connectors .......................................................112
Figure 9-3 Line Protection for Quad E1 Card .................................................................................................115
Figure 13-1 Sample Application for 3E1 DS0-SNCP Setup ...........................................................................138
Figure 13-2 Application for BERT and Loopback Diagnosis .........................................................................147

List of Tables

Table 2-1 Power Connector for Fan Tray .........................................................................................................23

Table 2-2 Power Connector for Main Unit ........................................................................................................23
Table 2-3 Console Port .....................................................................................................................................23
Table 2-4 Ethernet Port ....................................................................................................................................23
Table 2-5 Alarm Relay Circuit Contact State When Alarm Setup is Enable ....................................................24
Table 2-6 Alarm Relay Circuit Contact State When Alarm Setup is Disable ....................................................24
Table 2-7 FUSE Relay Connector ....................................................................................................................24
Table 3-1 Console Port Setting ........................................................................................................................32
Table 3-2 Alarm Action Table ...........................................................................................................................33
Table 3-3 System Alarm Type Table ................................................................................................................34
Table 3-4 Alarm Type Numbers .......................................................................................................................35
Table 3-5 Performance Parameter List ............................................................................................................36
Table 3-6 Performance Report Options ............................................................................................................36
Table 3-7 Front-Panel LED Table (DS1, DTE) .................................................................................................37
Table 3-8 Error Message Table ........................................................................................................................39
Table 6-1 Power consumption ..........................................................................................................................53
Table 6-2 Auto-Cleared Alarm Types ...............................................................................................................84
Table 14-1 Power Consumption of QX3440 Plug-in cards for -48 Vdc (100W), -48 Vdc (150W)
and -24 Vdc (150W) Power Modules .....................................................................................................150
Table 14-2 Power Consumption of QX3440 Plug-in cards for -125 Vdc (100W) Power Module ...................152
Table 15-1 Hardware Info Display Commands ..............................................................................................155
Table 15-2 Hardware Info Upload Commands ...............................................................................................156
D Bitte führen Sie das Gerät am Ende seinerLewbensdauer den zue Verfügung
stehended Rückgabeund Sammelsystemen zu.

GB At the end of the product's useful life, please dispose of it at appropriate collection
points provided in your country

F Une fois le produit en fin de vie, veuillez le déposer dans un point de recyclage
approprié.

ES Para preservar el medio ambiente, al final dela vida útil de su producto, depositelo
en los laguares destinado aello de acuerdo con la legislación vigente.

P No final de vida útil do producto, por favor coloque no ponto de recolha

apropriado.

I I Onde tutelare l'ambiente, non buttate l'apparecchio trai i normali rifiuti al termine
della sua vita utile, ma portatelo presso i punti di raccolta specifici per questi rifiuti
previsti dalla normativa vigente.

NL Wij raden u aan het apparant aan het einde van zijn nuttige levensduur, niet bij
hey gewone huisafval te deponeren, maar op de dearvoor bestemde adressen.

DK Når produktet er udtjent, bor det børtskaffes via de sæ rlige indsamlingssteder i

landet.

N Ved slutten av produktets levetid bør det avhendes på en kommunal miljøstasjon

eller leveres til en elektroforhandler.

S Lämna vänligen in produkten på lämplig återvinningsstation när den är förbrukad.

FIN Hävitä tuote käytöiän päättyessä viemällä se asianmukaiseen keräyspisteeseen.

PL Gdy produkt nie nadaje sie juz do dalszego uzytku, nalezy zostawic go w jednym
ze specjalnych punktów zajmujacych sie zbiórka zuzytych producktów w
wybranych miejscach na terenie kraju.

CZ Po skončení jeho životnosti odložte prosím výrobek na přislušném sbĕrném místé

zřízeném dle předpisů ve vaší zemi.

SK Po skončení jeho životnosti odovzdajte prosím zariadenie na príslušnom zbernom

mieste podía platných miestnych predpisov a noriem.

SLO Ko se izdelku izteče življenska doba, ga odnesite na ustrezno zbirno mesto

oziroma ga odvrzite v skladu z veljavnimi predpisi.

GR Στο Тέλος тης λειτουργικής Ζωής του προϊόντος παρακαλώ

Πετξτε το στα ειōικά σημεία που Παρέχονται οτη χωρα σας.

PRC 當產品使用壽命結束,請在你的國家所提供的適當地點做好回收處理
1 Product Description QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

1 Product Description
1.1 Function Description

For QX3440 Access DCS-MUX:

The CXR-QX3440 is an Access DCS-MUX that combines various digital access interfaces into E1 or T1 lines
for convenient transport and switching. The QX3440 Access DCS-MUX provides access for a variety of TDM,
IP, and voice interfaces detailed on next page. These interfaces are compatible with other CXR products.
Using these products, a DTE interface can be extended over copper wire pairs or any E1/T1 transport facility.
For each Quad E1/T1 plug-in card, each card can have as many as DS0 124/96 time slots from G.SHDSL,
RS232, X.21, V.35, V.36 and EIA530/RS449 interfaces, which can be multiplexed to fill 4 E1/T1 lines. QX3440
also supports fiber optical plug-in card, which can be used to aggregate up to 4 E1 channels onto a single fiber
optical interface to connect with other QX3440 or HX9310-E1.

The QX3440 has capacity for 12 single slots and 4 mini plug-in slots

This unit is a full cross-connect and can act as a mini DACS. This means that one or more of the WAN ports
can be used as a Drop & Insert function with fractional E1/T1 lines that can be multiplexed into a full E1/T1 line.

Redundancy is available in dual controller and power supply options, making it an excellent fit for critical
applications. Although the chassis does not contain a fan and has no need for fan cooling, an external fan tray
is available.

The QX3440 supports local control and diagnostics by using an external 2-line by 40-character LCD display
and keypad, or by using a VT-100 terminal connected to the console port. The QX3440 also supports Ethernet,
Telnet, and SNMP so that it can be controlled and diagnosed from a remote location. An in-band management
channel with GUI is available. In addition to the LCD display, there are LED indicator lights for all plug-in cards.

Finally, the QX3440 consists of a rugged reinforced aluminum chassis, giving this equipment a more durable
structure and a longer physical life.

For CXR-VV Y-BOX:

CXR-VV Y-BOX is designed to provide 1 for 1 protection function for Quad E1 interfaces of QX3440 shelf.
Two kinds of connector type are available for Y-BOX: BNC connector and RJ48C connectors. Each Y-BOX
with BNC connectors support 1 for 1 protection function for 2 Quad E1 interfaces of QX3440, and each Y-BOX
with RJ48C connectors support 1 for 1 protection function for 8 Quad E1 interfaces of QX3440

1.2 Physical Description

Although it can be used as a desk-top unit, the QX3440 is designed for rack mounting. Typically this unit is to
be installed in a Central Office location and is available with choice of single -48Vdc (100W), -48Vdc (150W),
-125Vdc (100W) or -24Vdc (150W), order two for redundancy.

Note: If the user orders -125 Vdc power module, the maximum number of particular cards allowed in slot 1 to
12 is: Four 12-channel FXS, Nine 12-channel Magneto, Eleven 8-channel 2W/4W E&M, Six 8-channel
OCU-DP, Two 4-channel G. SHDSL (1 pair) with line power, Three 2-channel G. SHDSL (2 pairs) with line
power, Two 24-channel FXS.

The front of the unit can accept E1, T1, FOM, Router, G.SHDSL, Dry Contact, G.703, C37.94, TDMoE, Data
Bridge, DTE (V.35/V.36, X2.1/V.11, EIA530/RS449, and RS232), Conference, E&M, Magneto, FXS/FXO and
TS interface lines in 4 mini slots and 12 single slots. Also there is a console port for connection to a VT-100
terminal.

The rear of the unit is blank except for DC fan connectors which will supply power to an external fan tray, if
warranted.

CXR Page 1
1 Product Description QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

1.3 Application

E1/T1 E1/ T1 E1/T1

NETWORK
CXRView
SNMP Manager
)

E1/T1 LAN

Dual- slot plug-in cards:

QX 3440
1 1 1

6 - channel X.21/ V.11

-1 -2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2

C C
P P 6 - channel V.35
U U
6 - channel V.36
1 2
6 - channel EIA530/RS449
24 - channel FXS
24 - channel FXO
2 - channel G.SHDSL w / line power
Mini- Slot plug- in Cards Single- Slot plug- in Cads
: 4 - channel G.SHDSL w/ line power
1 - channel E1 3 - channel E1 Note Transfer Trip (TTA)
1 - channel T1 4 - channel E1
Mini Quad E1 4 - channel T1
1 - channel E1 ATM Frame Relay (D) 8 - channel OCU -DP
1 - channel T1 ATM Frame Relay (D)
2 - channel G. SHDSL w/o line power
32 WAN port Router
4 - channel G. SHDSL w/o line power
64 WAN port Router
8 - channel G.703 64 Kbps
Fiber Optical Interface
8 - channel Dry Contact I/O
3 - channel Terminal Server
1 - channel DTE (1X.21, 1V.35, 8 - channel Dry Contact I/O type B
1RS232, or 1EIA530) 8 - channel 2 W / 4 W E & M
Mini 4 T1/E1
12 - channel FXS
12- channel FXO
12 - channel Magneto
1 - channel C37. 94
4 - channel C 37.94
8 - channel RS232 with X .50 subrate
8- LAN - port / 64 - WAN - port Router - B
Conference card
TDMoE
8- Data Bridge Note : Only CHAJ Unit applicable to
DS0 SNCP function
1FOM-A (D) = Discontinued

8UDTEA

Figure 1-1 QX3440 Application Illustration (1 of 2)

Quad E1
Card E1 Line
QX3440 Y-Box
Quad E1
Card

Figure 1-2 QX3440 with Y-BOX (2 of 2)

CXR Page 2
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

1.4 Specifications for QX3440

Network Line Interface - T1

Line Rate 1.544 Mbps  32ppm Output Signal DSX1w/0, -7.5, -15 dB LBO
Line Code AMI or B8ZS Framing D4/ESF (selectable)
Input Signal DSX-1 0 dB to -30 dB w/ALBO Connector RJ48C

Network Line Interface - E1

Line Rate 2.048 Mbps  50 ppm Framing ITU G.704
Line Code AMI or HDB3 Connector BNC/RJ48C
Input Signal ITU G.703 Electrical 75 ohm Coax/120 ohm twisted pair
Output Signal ITU G.703 Jitter ITU G.823

Network Line Interface - Mini 4E1

Line Rate 2.048 Mbps  50 ppm Framing ITU G.704
Line Code AMI or HDB3 Connector DB25S
Input Signal ITU G.703 Electrical 75 ohm Coax/120 ohm twisted pair
Output Signal ITU G.703 Jitter ITU G.823

Network Line Interface - 3E1

Line Rate 2.048 Mbps  50 ppm Framing ITU G.704
Line Code AMI or HDB3 Connector BNC/RJ48C
Input Signal ITU G.703 Electrical 75 ohm Coax/120 ohm twisted pair
Output Signal ITU G.703 Jitter ITU G.823
Function Support DS0-SNCP circuit level protection

Network Line Interface - 4E1

Line Rate 2.048 Mbps  50 ppm Framing ITU G.704
Line Code AMI or HDB3 Connector BNC/RJ48C
Input Signal ITU G.703 Electrical 75 ohm Coax/120 ohm twisted pair
Output Signal ITU G.703 Jitter ITU G.823

Network Line Interface - 4T1

Line Rate 1.544 Mbps  32 ppm Output Signal DSX1w/0, -7.5, -15 dB LBO
Line Code AMI or B8ZS Framing D4/ESF (selectable)
Input Signal DSX-1 0 dB to -30 dB w/ALBO Connector RJ48C

Router Interface
Number of ports 2 LAN ports, Max. 32 WAN ports
Physical Interface 10 BaseT x 1, 10/100 BaseT x 1
Connector RJ45
Routing protocol RIP-I, RIP-II
Data Rates Channelized N x 64 Kbps, 1 n 32
Supporting Protocols TCP/IP, PPP, HDLC

Router-A Interface
Number of ports 2 LAN ports, Max. 64 WAN ports, Each WAN port has data rate n x 64K bps, 1 n 32 ( 4Mbps for
total of all 64 WAN ports
Physical Interface 10/100 BaseT x 2
Connector RJ45
Routing protocol RIP-I, RIP-II, OSPF, Static
Supporting Protocols PPP (IPCP/BCP), MLPPP, HDLC, Frame Relay, and Cisco compatible HDLC, NAT/NAPT, DHCP
Diagnostic Ping, Trace route
QoS Rate limit

Router-B Interface
Number of ports 8 LAN ports, Max. 64 WAN ports. Each WAN port has data rate n x 64K bps, 1 n 32 ( 8Mbps for
total of all 64 WAN ports
Physical Interface 10/100 BaseT x 8
Connector RJ45
Routing protocol RIP-I, RIP-II, OSPF, Static
Supporting Protocols PPP (IPCP/BCP), MLPPP, HDLC, Frame Relay, and Cisco compatible HDLC, NAT/NAPT, DHCP
Diagnostic Ping, Trace route
QoS Rate limit
VLAN Q-in-Q IEEE 802.1ad

CXR Page 3
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Terminal Server Interface

Connector One DB-44 converseion cable to one DB-9 and two DB-25 connecotrs
Ports One Async RS232 port, two Async/Sync RS232 ports.
The two Async/Sync ports can be configured independently as Asynchronous or
Synchronous.
Data Rate Async: 1.2kbps, 2.4kbps, 4.8kbps, 9.6kbps, 19.2kbps, 38.4kbps
Sync: 64 kbps
Layer 2 Protocol of RS232 Async Raw data, SLIP
Layer 2 Protocol of RS232 Sync PPP
Terminal Server Function Supports Telnet
Router Function RIP- I, RIP-II, Static Route

Fiber Optical Interface / 1FOM-A Interface

Source MLM Laser Line Code Scrambled NRZ
Wavelength 1310  50 nm, 1550  40 nm Detector Type PIN-FET
50 Km reach Protection Optional 1+1 APS
NOTE: Longer or shorter, 15 to 120Km, on special order.

Optical Fiber Interface Characteristics

Optical Module Fiber Direction Wavelength (nm) Connector Distance (km)
Single Dual uni-direction 1310 SC (Subscriber Connector) 30
1310 SC (Subscriber Connector) 50
1310 FC (Fiber Connector) 30
1550 SC (Subscriber Connector) 20
1550 SC (Subscriber Connector) 100
Single Single bi-direction (master) 1310/1550 SC (Subscriber Connector) 30
Single bi-direction (slave) 1310/1550 SC (Subscriber Connector) 30

G.SHDSL Line Interface

Number of ports 2 or 4
Line Rate for 4-channel G.shdsl n x 64 Kbps (n=3 to 31)
Line Rate for 2-channel G.shdsl n x 64Kbps (n= 3 to 15)
Line Code 16- TCPAM, full duplex with adaptive echo cancellation
Connecotr RJ45
Electrical Unconditioned 19-26 AWG twisted pair
Sealing current Max. 20 MA source current
Clock Source From System, Line
Diagnostic Test G.SHDSL Loopback: To-LINE, To-bus,
BERT:QRSS

DTE Interface (X.21)

Data Port 6-port DTE X.21 card; 1-port DTE X.21 card
Data Rate 56 or 64 Kbps, n = 1 to 32
Connector DB15S

DTE Interface (V.35)

Data Port 6-port DTE V.35 card; 1-port V.35 card
Data Rate 56 or 64 Kbps, n = 1 to 32
Connector DB25S (optional conversion cable DB25S to M34 connector)

DTE Interface (V.36)

Data Port 6-port DTE V.36 card
Data Rate 56 or 64 Kbps, n = 1 to 32
Connector DB25S (optional conversion cable DB25S to DB37 connector)

DTE Interface (EIA530/RS449)

Data Port 6-port EIA530 DTE card; 1-port EIA530 card
Data Rate 56 or 64 Kbps, n = 1 to 32
Connector DB25S (optional conversion cable DB25S male to DB37 female connector for RS449)

DTE Interface (RS232/V.24)

Data Port 1-port RS232 card
Data Rate 56 or 64 Kbps *n, n=1 - 2
Mapping Any sequential time slots

CXR Page 4
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

DTE Interface (RS232 with V.110 encoding. 8-port)

Data Port 8-port RS232 cards
MUX Maximum 5 subrate port per 64K bps
Data Rate Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K
Asynchronous
Independent mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K
Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K
Synchronous
Independent mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K, 48K, 64K
Port Number
Card Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Eight RJ48 Async Note 1 Async Note 1 Async Async Note 1 Async Note 1 Async Async Async
Two DB44 + Two Async/Sync Async/Sync Async Async/Sync Async/Sync Async Async Async
RJ48
Connector Eight RJ48 (port 1 to port 8)
DB44 (port1, port2, port3), DB44 (port4, port5, port6), RJ48 (port7) and RJ48 (port8)
Conversion Cable A three-into-one conversion cable adapts the DB44 connector to 3 connecters (one DB9S and two
DB25S)
Electrical RS232 Interface, DCE
Note: Up to 19.2 Kbps achieved by oversampling at 64 Kbps

DTE Interface (RS232 with V.110 encoding, 6-port)

Data Port Up to 6 port
MUX Maximum 6 subrate port / 64Kbps
Protocol Supports V.110
Data Rate Asynchronous Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K
Independent mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K
Synchronous Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K,
Independent mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K, 48K, 64K
Card Type Port Number
1 2 3 4 5 6
RJ48 Async Async Async Async Async Async
DB44 Sync/Async Sync/Async Async Sync/Async Sync/Async Async
Connector DB44 (port1,port2,port3) DB44 (port4,port5,port6) or
RJ48 (port 1 to Port 6 are 6RJ48)
Alarm Remote Alarm
RTS Loss
Loopback To-DTE
To-DS1 (To Line)
Electrical RS232 Interface, DCE

DTE Interface (Data Bridge Card)

Data Port 8-port data bridge card (each card supports up to 120 DS0 for data bridge)
Feature 20 end points per multi-drop circuit to into a logical ended 56K or 64K channel
Per port supports bridge function to N remote Trib. Site (N=1~20)
Data Rate Asynchronous Support to receive 1200 to 19200 bps asynchronous data via oversampling
channel
Bridge function one port with one DS-0 to many (Maximum is 20 for remote Tributary data box )
20 drops for each DS0 to remote Tributary data box and 8 ports RS232 shared the 128 channels.

6CDA G.703 Interface Card

Data Port 6-port
Interface cc mode : ITU G.703 64 Kbps co-directional and Contra-directional controlling (DCE) interface
cs mode : ITU G.703 64 Kbps co-directional and Contra-directional subordinate (DTE) interface
mixed mode : ITU G.703 64 Kbps co-directional, Contra-directional controlling (DCE) and
Contra-directional subordinate (DTE) interface
Connector 120ohm, RJ48
Line Distance Up to 500 meters
Alarm Co-directional : LOS and insert AIS(All 1)
Contra-directional : LOO (Loss Of Octet)
Loopack DTE Payload Loopback, Local Loopback

8UDTEA (RS232/RS422/RS485) universal data Interface

Data Port 8 port UDTE card
ASYNC Data Rate 200,300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19.2K, 38.4K, 57.6K, 115.2K, 128K bps by
oversampling
Connector RJ48C
Interface DCE only

CXR Page 5
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Flow Control (RS232 only) Hardware (RTS and DTR), none

Loopback function DTE to DTE loopback
DTE to Line loopback

6UDTEA Card Specifications

Mode 1: DTE Interface (RS232)
Data Port Up to 2
MUX Maximum 6 subrate port / 64Kbps
Data Rate Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K
Asynchronous Independent mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K
Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K,
Synchronous Independent mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K, 48K, 64K

Connector
RJ48-ASYNC (Port5, Port6)
Alarm
Remote Alarm
RTS Loss
Loopback To-DTE
To-DS1 (To Line)
Electrical DCE
Protocol V.110

DTE Interface (RS422/RS232)

Data Port Up to 4
MUX Maximum 4 subrate port / 64Kbps
Data Rate Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K
Asynchronous Independent mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K
Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K,
Synchronous Independent mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K, 48K, 64K

Connector DB44 (Port1, Port2), DB44 (Port3, Port4)

Alarm Remote Alarm
RTS Loss
Loopback To-DTE
To-DS1 (To Line)
Electrical DCE
Protocol V.110

DTE Interface (X.21/RS232)

Data Port Up to 4
MUX Maximum 4 subrate port / 64Kbps
Subrate Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K
Asynchronous
Independent mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K
Synchronous Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K,
Independent mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K, 48K, 64K
Connector DB44 (Port1, Port2), DB44 (Port3, Port4)
Alarm Remote Alarm
RTS Loss
Loopback To-DTE
To-DS1 (To Line)
Electrical DCE
Protocol V.110
Mode 2: DTE Interface (X.21/RS232/V.35/V.36/EIA530/RS449)
Data Port Up to 4 (Port 1 to 4)
Data Rate N*64kbps, N = 1 to 32
Connector DB44 (Port 1, Port 2), DB44 (Port 3, Port 4)
Alarm
RTS Loss
Loopback To-DTE
To-DS1 (To Line)
Electrical DCE

CXR Page 6
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Note: When oversampling is enabled in MOD2, port 5 ~ 6 will be disabled.

Mode 3: DTE Interface (X.21/RS232/V.35/V.36/EIA530/RS449)
Data Port Up to 4 (Port 1 to 4)
Data Rate N*64kbps, N = 1 to 32 for port 1 ~ 3
N*64Kbps, N = 1 to 20 for port 4
Connector DB44 (Port 1, Port 2), DB44 (Port 3, Port 4)
Alarm RTS Loss
Loopback To-DTE
To-DS1 (To Line)
Electrical DCE
Data Port Up to 2 (Port 5, Port 6)
MUX Maximum 2 oversampling port / 64Kbps
Data Rate Asynchronous 200, 300, 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K
Connector RJ48 (Port 5, Port 6)
Alarm Remote Alarm
RTS Loss
Loopback To-DTE
To-DS1 (To Line)
Electrical DCE

1 Port OCU-DP Interface Card

Ports 1 Ports card
Operating Modes 4-wire DDS or switched 56
Dedicated Rates SYNC: 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 56 and 64k clear channel
Conforms with AT&T Pub 41458
OCU DP Operation Conforms with AT&T 62310 and ANSI T1.410
Local Loop Signal Bipolar Return to zero, 50% duty cycle
Transmit Amplitude +/- 1.5 V (+/- 10%) peak, all rates except 9.6k
+/- 0.75 V (+/- 10%) peak at 9.6k
Transmit Source Impedance 135 Ohms +/- 20%
Receive Input Impedance 135 Ohms +/- 20%
Receiver Sensitivity/ Dynamic 0 to 43 dB loop loss at 72K & 56K
Range 0 to 34 all other rates
Physical Interface 4-wire loop interface
RJ45 modular connector
Network to Loop Test Codes Zero code suppression, Idle, out of service, UMC, MOS, TC, ABS, channel loopback,
OCU and DSU loop-back, latch loop-back (TIP, LSC, LBE, FEV)
Loop to Network Test Codes Zero code suppression, Idle

8 Port OCUDP Interface Card

Ports 8 Ports for each card
Line Status Indicator Per Port 1 dual color LED; Red for LOS, Green for SYNC
Network Connector RJ48S
Electrical Network Connection Tip/Ring and Tip1/Ring1
Transmit Source Impedance 135 Ohms +/-20%
Receive Input Imdednace 135 Ohms +/-20%
Receiver Sensitivity 0 to 43 dB loop loss at 72K & 56K
Dynamic Range 0 to 34 all other rates Automatic line equalization
Pulse Amplitude +/- 1.5V (+/-10%) peak, all rates except 9.6K
+/-0.75 (+/-10%) peak at 9.6K
Bipolar Return to zero, 50 duty cycle
Sealing Current Typically 16mA DC
Operating Modes 4-wire DDS
Switched 56 support is optional
Circuit Rates SYNC: 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 56, 72 kbps (64k) clear channel
Conforms with AT&T Pub 41458
Encoding and decoding rules Use bipolar violation to indicate control information: Idle, out of service, Zero
Subsitution using unframed loops
Maintenance control DSU Non-latching loop-back code (for 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 56k circuit rate)
DSU Latching loop-back (TIP, LSC, LBE, FEV) code (for 72k circuit rate)

Machine maintenance OCU/DP card operation:

Payload loopback
OCU loopback
Local loopback

CXR Page 7
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Bi-directional loopback
V.54 remote loopback code
Custom defined remote loopback code
BERT test support all ones, all zeros, 2047,511,63 pattern.
Fault and Performance LOS, OOS, ES, SES and UAS alarm.
Current, last 96 registry and 7 days performance storage.
Enviroment Operating: 0-50°C
Storage: -25-75°C
Humidity: Up to 90% RH non-condensing
Specification Standard ANSI T1.410; AT&T Pub 62319, AT&T Pub 62310, ITU-T V.54

Co-directional Interface
Interface ITU G.703 64 Kbps co-directional interface
Connector 120ohm, RJ48
Line Distance Up to 500 meters
Loopback DTE Payload Loopback, Local Loopback

C37.94 Interface
820nm
Source LED Optical Line Rate 2.048Mbps
Wavelength 820nm Line Code NRZ
Connector ST Fiber Type Multi-mode
Optical Power -12dBm
850nm
Source VCSEL Optical Line Rate 2.048Mbps
Wavelength 850nm Line Code NRZ
Connector ST Duplex Plastic Connector Fiver Type Multi-mode
Optical Power -5.5dBm
1310nm
Source LED Optical Line Rate 2.048Mbps
Wavelength 1310nm Line Code NRZ
Connector ST Fiber Type Single & Multiple
Optical Power -14dBm
1550nm
Source LED Optical Line Rate 2.048Mbps
Wavelength 1550nm Line Code NRZ
Connector SC Fiber Type Single & Multiple
Optical Power -14dBm

Dry Contact Type A Interface

Inputs - Outputs -
8-channel 2-port per card, 4-pair per port 8-channel 8-pair per card
Connector RJ45 Connector Screw type
Internal Resistance 1K Initial Insulation Resistance Min. 100M ohm (at 500 Vdc)
Activation Current 3 ma Max. Current 5A
Deactivation Current 1.5 ma Max. Voltage 100 Vdc, 250 Vac
Allowable Current 4 ma

CXR Page 8
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Dry Contact Type B Interface

Inputs - Outputs -
8-channel 2-port per card, 4-pair per port 8-channel 8-pair per card
Connector RJ45 Connector Screw type
Internal Resistance 100 K Initial Insulation Resistance Min. 1000M ohm (at 500 Vdc)
Activation Current 3 ma Max. Current 2A
Deactivation Current 1.5 ma Max. Voltage 220 Vdc, 250 Vac
Allowable Current 4 ma

Voice Card (Q2EM, Q4EM)

Connector One 44-pin connector, adapter cable included for 4 RJ45 connectors.
Power 110-220Vac, –24Vdc, –48Vdc
Alarm Conditioning CGA busy after 2.5 seconds of LOS, LOF
Encoding A-law or -law, user selectable as a group
Impedance
Longitudinal Rejection 55 dB
Longitudinal Max 2.5 volts peak AC
Longitudinal Balance > 63dB
Gain Adjustment 0, -3, -6 or +7 dB for transmit (D/A) gain
(all port settings) 0, -3, -6 or +10 dB for receive (A/D) gain

Signal/Distortion > 46dB with 1004 Hz, 0dBm input

Frequency Response +0.5 to -0.9 dB from 300 to 3400 Hz
Idle Channel Noise < 20 dBrnC0
Signaling Type 1, Type 2, Type 3, Type 4, Type 5, and also TO (Transmit Only)
Modems Full compatibility with V.90 modems
E Lead Sensor Current 0.25 mA (minimum)
Signaling Bit Setting Jump Selectable
Operational Temp. 0°C to +50°C
Relative Humidity 0% to 95%
 All in-band signaling tones are carried transparently by the digitizing process.
 Customer is responsible for in-band signaling compatibility between a telephone and a switch, or between a PBX and
a switch.

Voice Card (QEMA)

Connector One 44-pin connector, adapter cable included for 4 RJ45 connectors.
Power 110-220Vac, ±48Vdc
Alarm Conditioning CGA busy after 2.5 seconds of LOS, LOF
Encoding A-law or -law, user selectable as a group
Impedance Balanced
Gain Adjustment -10 to +7 dB / 0.1dB step for transmit (D/A) gain
(Per-port setting)
Gain Variation ± 0.5 dB at 0 dBm0 input
Frequency Response ± 0.5 dB at 0 dBm0 input
I/O Power Range A/D Analog input level: -66 dBm (0.00039 Vrms) ~ + 3 dBm (1.09 Vrms)
D/A Analog output level: -66 dBm (0.00039 Vrms) ~ + 4 dBm (1.22 Vrms)
Longitudinal Balance > 63dB
Longitudinal Conversion Loss ＞ 46dB
Total Distortion ＞ 35 dB at 0 dBm0 input
Idle Channel Noise ＜ -65 dBm0p
Wire Mode 2 wire and 4 wire
Signaling Type I, Type II, Type III, Type IV, Type V, and TO (Transmission Only)
M Lead Output Current 18 mA (maximum)
E Lead Sensor Current 0.3 mA (minimum)
EM Type Setting Jump Selectable
Operational Temp. 0°C to +50°C
Relative Humidity 0% to 95%
Carrier Connection Side A and side B setup by Jump
 All in-band signaling tones are carried transparently by the digitizing process.
 Customer is responsible for in-band signaling compatibility between a telephone and a switch, or between a PBX and
a switch.

Voice Card (8EM & 8EMA)

Connector Eight RJ45

CXR Page 9
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Power 100-240Vac or -48Vdc for 8E&M, ±48 Vdc for 8EMA

Alarm Conditioning CGA busy after 2.5 seconds of LOS, LOF
Encoding A-law or -law, user selectable together for all
Impedance Balanced 600 or 900 ohms
Gain Adjustment (Per-port setting) -16 to +7 dB / 0.1dB step for transmit (D/A) gain
-16 to +14 dB / 0.1dB step for receive (A/D) gain
I/O Power Range A/D Analog input level: -66 dBm (0.00039 Vrms) ~ + 3 dBm (1.09 Vrms)
D/A Analog output level: -66 dBm (0.00039 Vrms) ~ + 4 dBm (1.22 Vrms)
Gain Variation ± 0.5 dB at 0 dBm0 input
Frequency Response ± 0.5 dB at 0 dBm0 input
Longitudinal Conversion Loss > 46dB
Total Distortion ＞ 35 dB at 0 dBm0 input
Idle Noise ＜ -65 dBm0p
Carrier Connection Side A ( exchange side) and Side B (carrier side) setup by side switch
Idle Channel Noise Max. –65 dBm0p
Wire Mode 2 wire and 4 wire (programmable)
Signaling Type 1, Type 2, Type 3, Type 4, and Type 5, Transmit only (programmable)
Modems Full compatibility with V.90 modems
 All in-band signaling tones are carried transparently by the digitizing process.
 Customer is responsible for in-band signaling compatibility between a telephone and a switch, or between a PBX and
a switch.

Voice Card 12 MAG (Magneto)

Connector Twelve RJ11
Alarm Conditioning CGA busy after 2.5 seconds of LOS, LOF
Encoding A-law or -law, user selectable together for all
Impedance Balanced 600 or magneto telephone impedance match
Longitudinal Conversion Loss > 46dB
Gain Adjustment -21 to +10 dB / 0.1dB step transmit & receive
Signal/ Distortion > 25dB with 1004 Hz, 0dBm input
Frequency Response - 0.25 to -1 dB from 300 to 3400 Hz, coincide with ITU-T G.712
Idle Channel Noise Max. –65 dBm0p
Min Detectable Ringing Voltage 16 Vrms
Ringing Detectable Across L1 and L2 (Tip and Ring), L1 and GND (Tip and GND)
Ringing Generation Voltage: 76 Vrms (sine wave)
Frequency: 20Hz (with optional choices of 16, 25, 50 Hz)
Cadence:
1. Normal:
Ring after crank
2. PLAR ON:
-Single Ring Type: ring for 2 sec. and stop, or ring for 4 sec. and stop
-Continuous Ring Type: 1 sec on 2 sec off, or 2 sec on 4 sec off
Ringing Send Across L1 and L2 (Tip and Ring), L1 and GND (Tip and GND)
Signaling Magneto MRD(Ringing across Tip and Ring or Tip and Ground)
Signaling Bit A,B,C,D Programable
Signaling is carried transparently by the digitizing process.
Use Magneto card default setting for communications between magneto telephones
Use Magneto card PLAR mode setting for communications between a magneto telephone and a regular telephone

Echo Canceller Card

Echo Cancellation 64ms uni-directional, 64ms bi-directional and 128ms uni-directional
Channel Up to 64 channels
Functions - one way or bi-direction cancellation from PCM bus to ECA card
- E1/T1 multichannel echo cancellation
PCM encoder/decoder Compatible with ITU-T G.711 A-law/Mu-law coding.
LED Indicator Multi-color indication
Compliant ITU-T G.165 and ITU-T G.168-2000 and 2002

Analog Bridge Card

Analog Bridge Analog bridge card works with voice cards (E&M, Magneto, FXS and FXO*)
supported by the QX3440 for analog voice modem application
Architecture Master/Slave

CXR Page 10
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Group - Up to 8 groups. Each group has maximum 16 timeslots (2 DS0 for Master and 14 DS0
for Slave)
Functions - Downstream 2 to many
- Upstream many to 2 (only one active)
PCM encoder/decoder Compatible with ITU-T G.711 A-law/Mu-law coding.
* Future Option
M4TE Cards
The M4TE card supports DB37 to RJ48 connector, DB37 to 8BNC connector, and wire-wrap connector. E1/T1 per card is
software configurable.
Network Line Interface - T1
Line Rate 1.544 Mbps  32 ppm Framing D4/ESF
Line Code AMI/B8ZS Connector RJ48F, BNC, T1
Input Signal DSX-1 0dB to –30dB w/ALBO Output Signal DSX-1 w/0, -7.5, -15 dB LBO
Jitter AT&T TR 62411 Pulse Template AT&T TR 62411
Data Rate n * (64) Kbps (n=1 - 24) Surge Protection FCC Part 68 Sub Part D

Network Line Interface - E1

Line Rate 2.048 Mbps  50 ppm Framing ITU G.704
Line Code AMI/HDB3 Connector RJ48F or BNC
Input Signal ITU G.703 Output Signal ITU G.703
Jitter ITU G.823 Electrical 75 coax/120 twisted pair
Data Rate n * (64) Kbps (n = 1 - 32)

Conference Card
RS232 Interface
Data Port 2-ports per card
ASYNC Data Rate 300, 600, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K
SYNC not supported
Connector Two DB9, DCE, female

FXS Voice Interface

Connector Two RJ11
Encoding G.723
Longitudinal Conversion Loss > 46dB
Cross Talk Measure Max -70dBm0
Gain Adjustment transmit (D/A) gain 0, +6dB
receive (A/D) gain +6, 0, -6dB
Signal/ Distortion > 25dB with 1004 Hz, 0dBm input
Idle Channel Noise Max. –65 dBm0p
Loop Resistance Max 1800 ohm
FXS Loop Feed Normal -48 Vdc with 25mA current limit
FXS Ringing 2 REN
20Hz
76 Vrms
2 sec on / 4 sec off for 1 min, or 1 sec on / 2 sec off for 30 sec (programmable)
Signaling Loop Start, DTMF

E&M Voice Interface

Connector Two RJ45
Encoding G.723
Impedance Balanced 600 ohms
Longitudinal Conversion Loss > 46dB
Gain Adjustment transmit (D/A) gain 0, +6dB receive (A/D) gain +6, 0, -6dB
Signal/Distortion > 25dB with 1004 Hz, 0dBm input
Idle Channel Noise Max. –65 dBm0p
Carrier Connection Side A = exchange side, Side B = carrier side (Jumper selectable)
Phone line power+12V Type P (Jumper enable)
Operation mode Master, standard (Jumper selectable)
Wire Mode 4 wire
Signaling Type Type 1, Type 4, and Type 5 (Jumper selectable)
EM Ringing Single rainging for 5 sec only
2 sec on / 4 sec off for 1 min, or 1 sec on / 2 sec off for 30 sec (programmable)

CXR Page 11
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Voice Card (QFXS, QFXO)

Connector Four RJ11
Alarm Conditioning CGA busy after 2.5 seconds of LOS, LOF
Encoding A-law or -law, user selectable per card
AC impedance Balanced 600 or 900 ohms, user selectable per card
Longitudinal Conversion > 46dB
Loss
Loss Adjustment 0,3,6, or 9 dB transmit & receive, user selectable per card
Signal/Distorition > 25dB with 1004 Hz, 0dBm input
Frequency Response -0.25 to -1 dB from 300 to 3400 Hz
FXS Loop Feed Nominal -48 Vdc with 25mA current limit per port
FXS Ringing 1 REN at 5000 meters per port
20 Hz, other frequencies (manufacture option): 16.7 Hz, 25 Hz, 50 Hz
76 Vrms (sine wave)
User selectable ring cadence per card for PLAR function: 2 sec on 4 sec off, or 1 sec on 2 sec
off
FXO Ringing REN Ringing REN 0.5B (AC)
Detectable Ringing 25 Vrms
Loop Resistance  1800 
DC impedance (ON-HOOK) > 1M 
DC impedance (OFF-HOOK) 235  @ 25mA feed
90  @ 100mA feed
Metering Pulse 12 KHz/16 KHz
Power: 10dBm
Sensitivity: -18dBm to -45dBm (manufacture option)
Signaling Loop Start, GND-Start, Metering Pulse (12 KHz, 16 KHz), DTMF, Dialing Pulse, PLAR,
Battery Reverse (support Line Reverse Signaling for Billing)
 All in-band signaling tones are carried transparently by the digitizing process.
 Customer is responsible for in-band signaling compatibility between a telephone and a switch, or between a PBX and
a switch.
 -24Vdc power is for FXS PCB version C and up

Voice Card (QFXSA)

Quad FXSA voice card (4 FXS per plug-in)
Connector 1, 2, 3, or 4 FXS per RJ11 connector
Power ±48Vdc
Alarm Conditioning CGA busy after 2.5 seconds of LOS, LOF
Encoding A-law or -law, user selectable
AC impedance Balanced 600 or 900 ohms (user selectable)
Longitudinal Rejection 55 dB
Gain Adjustment -21 to +3 dB / 0.1 dB step for transmit (D/A) & receive (A/D) gain
Signal/ Distortion > 46dB with 1004 Hz, 0dBm input
Frequency Response - 0.25 to -1 dB from 300 to 3400 Hz
Loop Feed ±48Vdc with 25mA current limit per port
Jumper Selectable: 25mA, 30mA, 35mA
Ringing Support 2 REN per port (1 REN = 6930 + 8 F)
16.7Hz, 20Hz, 25 Hz, 50Hz (user programmable)
Default 78 Vrms (sine wave) (64 Vrms by Jumper setting)
2 sec on 4 sec off, or 1 sec on 2 sec off optional for PLAR (user programmable)
Metering Pulse 12KHz/ 16KHz (2.4Vrm/1Vrm user programmable)
Signaling Loop Start (Metering Pulse, DTMF, Dialing Pulse, PLAR), GND-Start (Tip Open, Ring GND),
OOS Alarm, Battery Reverse
 All in-band signaling tones are carried transparently by the digitizing process.
 Customer is responsible for in-band signaling compatibility between a telephone and a switch, or between a PBX and
a switch.

Voice Card (12FXS,12FXO,24FXS,24FXO)

12 FXS/FXO Connector Twelve RJ11
24 FXS/FXO Connector One RJ21X Female
Alarm Conditioning CGA busy after 2.5 seconds of LOS, LOF
Encoding A-law or -law, user selectable together for all
AC Impedance Balanced 600 or 900 ohms (selectable together for all)
Longitudinal Conversion Loss > 46dB
Cross talk measure Max -70dBm0
Gain Adjustment -21 to +10 dB / 0.1dB step transmit & receive

CXR Page 12
 2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Signal/ Distortion > 25dB with 1004 Hz, 0dBm input

Frequency Response - 0.25 to -1 dB from 300 to 3400 Hz, coincide with ITU-T G.712
Idle Channel Noise Max. –65 dBm0p
Variation of Gain ±0.5dB
FXO Ringing REN 0.5B (AC)
Detectable Ringing 25 Vrms
Loop Resistance  1800 
DC Impedance (ON-HOOK) > 1M 
DC Impedance (OFF-HOOK) 235  @ 25mA feed
90  @ 100mA feed
FXS Loop Feed -48Vdc or -24Vdc with 25mA current limite per port
Jumper Selectable: 25mA, 30mA, 35mA
FXS signalling Normal / Automatic Ring down
FXS Ringing 1 REN at 5K meters per port
16.7Hz, 20Hz, 25Hz, 50Hz, user selectable for all ports
38 to 85 Vrms (sine wave), 76 Vrms for default Ring Voltage
2 sec on 4 sec off, or 1 sec on 2 sec off optional for PLAR
Signaling Loop Start, DTMF, pulse, PLAR, Battery Reverse
Optional Signaling (for special Ground Start, Metering pulse (12 KHz, 16 KHz), and P( in PLAR mode, PLAR signalling
order) bits are programmable.
Signaling Bit A,B,C,D Programable bit
 All in-band signaling tones are carried transparently by the digitizing process.
 Customer is responsible for in-band signaling compatibility between a telephone and a switch, or between a PBX and a
switch.
 -24Vdc power is for FXS PCB version L and up

Transfer Trip Card (TTA)

Input
Number of channels 4-channel : 4 pairs per card
Input Connector Screw type
36 to 60V for 48/125V type
Voltage Range

Output
Number of Channels 4-Channel: 4 pairs per card
Output Connector Screw type
Max Current 30A (200ms per C37.90)
Max Voltage 280 Vdc
Operation time 3ms
Alarm Relay
Maximum continuous current 1A (inductive)
Maximum breaking current 1A (resistive)
Maximum open circuit voltage 280 Vdc
Maximum operation time 15ms
Environmental
Operating temperature -20°C to +55°C
Humidity 5 - 95% non-condensing
Power substation IEEE1613*
Isolation
ANSI ANSI C37.90.1 SWC
EMI/RFI
ANSI ANSI C37.90.2

CXR Page 13
 2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Phone Line Monitor Card

Connector Four RJ11 connectors
Alarm Conditioning CGA busy after 2.5 seconds of LOS, LOF
Encoding A-law or -law, user selectable as a group
Impedance
Total Distortion > 35dB with 1004 Hz, 0dBm input
Frequency Response 0 ~ -0.5 dB from 300 to 2000 Hz
-0.5 dB ~ -2 dB from 2000 to 3300 Hz
Idle Channel Noise  -60 dBm0
Gain Adjustment 0, -3, -6 or +7 dB for PLM (B) transmit gain (D/A)
(All Port Setting) 0, -3, -6 or +3dB for PLM (A) receive gain (A/D)
Off-Hook Detect Level  -6V Line to GND
Operational Temp. 0°C to 50°C
Relative Humidity 0% to 95%
Power 110 ~ 220 VAC, -48 Vdc
All in-band signaling tones are carried transparently by the digitizing process.

Signaling Bits
Normal AB Bit Invert
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Status A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D
Line On Hook 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
PLM (A) to Line
Line Off Hook 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1

Battery (-48V) 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

PLM (B) to Monitor

Battery (-6V) 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1

TDMoE
Combo Gigabit Ethernet(GbE) Interface
Number of Ports 2
Speed 10/100/1000M bps
Connector RJ45 for twisted pair GbE, LC for optical GbE, auto detection

Gigabit Ethernet(GbE) Interface

Number of Port 2
Speed 10/100/1000 BaseT
Connector RJ45

Ethernet Function
Basic Features MDI/MDIX for 10/100/1000M BaseT auto-sensing
Ping function contained ARP
Per port, programmable MAC hardware address learn limiting (max. MAC table 8192 (8k) entry)
Packet Delay Variation:
- Unframed T1: Up to 340 ms
- Framed T1: Up to 256 ms
- E1:up to 256 ms
- Framed T1 with CAS: Up to 192 ms
Packet Transparency Packet transparency support for all types of packet types including IEEE 802.1q VLAN and
802.1ad (Q-in-Q)
QoS User configurable 802.1p CoS, ToS in out going IP frame
Traffic Control Ingress packet Rate limiting buckets per port for Ethernet port
Supporting Rate-based and Priority-based rate limiting for LAN port
Granularity:
a. From 64 Kbps to 1 Mbps in increments of 64 Kbps
b. From 1 Mbps to 100 Mbps in increments of 1 Mbps
c. From 100 Mbps to 1000 Mbps in increments of 10Mbps

Pause frame issued when the traffic exceeding the limited rate before packet dropped following
IEEE802.3X

CXR Page 14
 2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Jitter & Wander

PPM: per G.823 Traffic
PPB: per G.823 Synchronous*

Standard Compliance
IETF TDMoIP (RFC5087), SAToP (RFC4553), CESoPSN (RFC5086)
IEEE 802.1q, 802.1p, 802.1d, 802.3, 802.3u, 802.3x, 802.3z, 802.1s, 802.1w

Clock Source
Internal, Line Interface, External (E1/T1/2048 KHz)

Alarm Relay
Alarm Relay: max. current: 1A for 24VDC/ 0.625A for 48VDC
Fuse alarm, and performance alarm

System Configuration Parameters

Active Configuration, Stored Configuration, and Default Configuration (Stored in Non-volatile Memory)

Management
Console Electrical: RS232; Connector: DB9, female
User Interface: Menu driven VT-100
Ethernet 1 port, Connector: RJ45
10/100 Base T, SNMPv1, v3/Telnet/SSH
Inband Management Inband 64 Kbps, support HDLC/PPP
Ethernet LCD Optional

Performance Monitor
Performance Registers Last 24 hours performance in 15 minute intervals and last 7 days in 24 hour summaries
Separate Registers Network, user, and remote site
Performance Reports Reports include E1 Bursty Errored Second, Severe Errored Second, Degraded Minutes.
Also available in Statistics (%)
Alarm Queue Containing 300 alarm records which record the latest alarm type, location, and date &
time
Threshold Bursty Seconds, Severely Errored Second, Degraded Minutes

Diagnostics
Loopback E1/T1 interface (Line Loopback, Payload Loopback, Local Loopback)
Test Pattern For Controller: 220-1, 215-1, 211-1, 29-1, and 4-bye user define pattern

Physical /Electrical
Dimensions 432.4 x 220 x 223.5 mm (WHD)
Power Single/ Dual -48 Vdc: -36 to -75 Vdc, 100 Watts max.
Single/ Dual -48 Vdc: -36 to -75 Vdc, 150 Watts max.
Single/ Dual -24 Vdc: -18 to -36 Vdc, 150 Watts max
Single/ Dual -125 Vdc: -40 to -150 Vdc, 100 Watts max
Single -24/-48 Vdc: -18 to -75 Vdc, 150 Watts max
Temperature 0-55°C
Humidity 0-95%RH (non-condensing)
Mounting Desk-top stackable, 19” /23” rack mountable
Line Power Available only with DC power for G.SHDSL card only
Supply
Power Max 110 Watts
Consumption

Certification
EN55022 Class A, EN50024, FCC Part 15 Class A, FCC Part 68, CS-03, IEC60950, UL60950

Compliance
ITU G.703, G.704, G.706, G.732, G.736, G.823, G.826, G.711, G.775, O.151, V.11, V.28, V.54
IETF SNMP v.3 (RFC2571~2575)

CXR Page 15
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Specifications for CXR-VV Y-BOX

LINE
Connector BNC or RJ48C
Port Number For Y-BOX with BNC connectors: 4 line ports
For Y-BOX with RJ48C connectors: 16 line ports
Protection For Y-BOX with BNC connectors: support 2 Quad E1 plug-in card, 4 active E1, 4 standby E1
For Y-BOX with RJ48C connectors: support 8 Quad E1 plug-in cards, 16 active E1, 16 standby E1
For Y-BOX with RJ48C connectors: support 8 Quad T1 plug-in cards, 16 active T1, 16 standby T1

Mechanical
Height 44.5 mm/ 1.75 in
Width 432 mm/ 17 in
Depth 100 mm/ 3.9 in

Front Panel View (with BNC connectors)

A-TX LINE-TX B-TX A-TX LINE-TX B-TX A-TX LINE-TX B-TX A-TX LINE-TX B-TX
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4

A-RX LINE-RX B-RX A-RX LINE-RX B-RX A-RX LINE-RX B-RX A-RX LINE-RX B-RX

Front Panel View (with RJ48C connectors)

CXR Page 16
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

2 Installation
CAUTION:

 Only qualified service personnel shall install and maintain the system.
 This equipment must be connected to an earth socket-outlet, which has a permanent
connection to protective earth with a cross-sectional area of not less than 2.5 mm2.
 Ensure protective earthing connected before install /uninstall telephone wires.
 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
 Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet
locations.
 Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
 Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.

2.1 Site Selection

The following list indicates site selection guidelines. Follow this list to choose a proper installation site.

 Location of the rack should be part of the central office equipment layout design. Considerations should be
given to entrance cable routing and -48 Vdc (100W), -48 Vdc (150W), -125 Vdc (100W) or -24 Vdc (150W)
power.
 The installation site should have -48 Vdc power. An optional AC/DC power converter can be used. Use
only with Class 2 power source, -48 Vdc, 100 watts.

2.2 Mechanical Installation

QX3440 can be installed as a desk top unit or mounted on a 19 inch or a 23 inch rack. Mounting of the unit in a
rack follows standard telephone rack mount practices. Accessories to install on a 19 inch or 23 inch rack is
provided. As a desk-top unit QX3440 is stackable.

2.3 Electrical Installation

Central office -48 Vdc power is wired to terminal blocks in the front of the QX3440, shown in Figure 2-1.
Central office alarm system is wired to the Alarm Relay terminal blocks. For connection to the CONSOLE
(button down/ button up) connector for maintenance and administration, a CONSOLE port with DB9 connector
is located on the front panel, see also Figure 2-1. The RJ45 connector is for an Ethernet connection. For direct
modem or VT-100 terminal connection, use a DB9 RS232 cable to connect the CONSOLE port on the front
panel.

NOTE: When QX3440 is plugged with two controller cards, both of these two cards can be primary (master)
or redundant (slave) which only depends on which card completes boot up first after powering on the
main unit. User can tell which controller card is primary or redundant from the status of controller
cards' ACTIVE led. If ACTIVE led is flashing green, the controller card is primary. When one
controller card fails, the other becomes master and remains master even when the failed is replaced.

CXR Page 17
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

2.3.1 Chassis Grounding

The chassis ground screw is located in the right hand side of the rear panel.

Figure 2-1 Ground Screw Location

When attaching a ground wire to the chassis ground screw, follow these instructions.

 Use copper grounding conductors of 18 AWG

 Conductors should not be of dissimilar metals.
 The bare conductors should be coated with anti-oxidant before crimp connections are made.
 Any unplated connection surfaces, connectors, braided strap and bus bars must be bought to a bright
finish and coated with anti-oxidant before connections are made.

CXR Page 18
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

2.3.2 Electrical Installation Guide

The application drawing of DC power with grounding and without grounding are shown below.
Note: When the user uses DC power without grounding ( ), noise problems and E1 errors may occur.

FAN TRAY

POWER E1/T1(C) E1/T1(D) CPU- 1 CPU- 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

E 1/ E 1/
T1 T1 C C
P P
U U
E1/T1(A) E1/T1(B)

1 2

E 1/ E 1/
T1 T1

24
(1) 48 Vdc

- V +V
+V
125
-V

-24
(2) -48 Vdc GND
-125 +V - V +V

-V

+24
GND
(3) +48 Vdc *
- V +V

+V
+125 -V

: means short
* : 12FXS/FXO, 24FXS/FXO, QFXS/QFXO, 8E&M, QE&M, and
12 MAG can NOT use +24, +48, and +125 Vdc.

Note: 12FXS & 24FXS HW: Ver.N and up can support +24, +48, and +125 Vdc.
Figure 2-2 DC Power Without Grounding Application

CXR Page 19
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

POWER E1/T1(C) E1/T1(D) CPU-1 CPU-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

ER

VE

M
AR
E1/T1 E1/T1
W

TI
AC
PO

AL

Contr Contr
A B C D
SYNC/TES
oller oller
T E1/T1(A) E1/T1(B) Card Card
1 2
LOF

BPV
E1/T1 E1/T1

RAI/AIS

ACO

TIP EXT.
RING CLOCK Main Access DCS-Mux Shelf - Front Side
NC
FUSE
COM RELAY

NO
NC
ALARM
COM RELAY

NO
ETHERNET

Grounding
CONSOLE
9600,N,8,1

Screw
LCD INTERFACE

Main Access DCS-Mux Shelf - Rear Side

Controller
Card
Figure 2-3 Panel Views - Main Shelf and Controller Card

CXR Page 20
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

NOTE: When these plug-in cards (two controller cards, four mini Quad E1 plug-in cards, ten G.shdsl plug-in
cards, and one 100W UM5813 power module) are plugged into an QX3440, one more 100W
UM5813 power module should be added to plug into the QX3440.

48 V 48 V
8A 8A

+V +V
-V -V

POWER POWER

150W

-48 Vdc (-36 to -75 Vdc) -48 Vdc (-36 to -75 Vdc)
100W 150W
Power Module Power Module

24 V 47 -125 V
10A 5A

+V +V
-V -V

POWER POWER

-24 Vdc (-18 to -36 Vdc) -125 Vdc (-40 to -150 Vdc)
150W 100W
Power Module Power Module

Figure 2-4 Panel Views (for 1/2 slot) - Power Modules

CXR Page 21
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

2.3.3 Fan Tray Setting

FAN TRAY
POWER E1/T1(C) E1/T1(D) CPU-1 CPU-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

E1/ E1/
T1 T1 ContrContr
oller oller
Card Card
E1/T1(A) E1/T1(B)
1 2

E1/ E1/
T1 T1

Important Note: Install a fan tray on the top of a QX3440 to reduce the temperature when the following
modules are plugged into the QX3440 at the same time:
1. G.shdsl plug-in card with line power module

The fan power socket in the back of the QX3440 chassis would be activated if it use -48
Vdc power supply. In addition, the fan power module will not work when it use -24 Vdc
power supply.

Figure 2-5 Front Panel View - Fan Tray

Figure 2-6 Rear Panel View - Fan Tray

CXR Page 22
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Figure 2-7 Top View - Fan Tray

Table 2-1 Power Connector for Fan Tray

Signal Description
ALM Alarm
+V +DC Return
-V -DC 48 Volts

Table 2-2 Power Connector for Main Unit

Signal Description
-V -DC 48 Volts
+V +DC Return
Chassis Ground

The console port is configured as a DCE device with a DB-9 female connector. Pin definitions and pin
connections are listed in Table below.

Table 2-3 Console Port

Pin Number Signal Source
1 Data Carrier Detect To DTE
2 Receive Data To DTE
3 Transmit Data From DTE
4 Unassigned
5 Signal Ground
6 Data Set Ready To DTE
7 Unassigned
8 Clear to send To DTE
9 Unassigned

An ethernet port can be connected via Ethernet 10-Base-T interface. Pin definition is listed in Table below.

Table 2-4 Ethernet Port

Pin Number Signal Description
1 TPTX+ TP Driver Output
2 TPTX-
3 TPRX+ TP Receive Input
6 TPRX-
2.3.4 Alarm Relay

CXR Page 23
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

The Alarm Relay is applied to configure the Alarm Relay output present on the front panel of QX3440
Controller Card. Alarm Relay outputs are provided for operators to drive external alerting devices, such as
flashing lights and sirens. The Alarm Relay signals when the device has exceeded its alarm severity. The
Alarm Relay will act on pre-set conditions configured by the user according to the tables below. When the
alarm setup is Enabling, the alarm relay circuit will be triggered if the alarm is detected. To return the alarm
relay to the normal state after it is enabled, the user has three modes to choose from: Auto, Period and Manual.
For detailed information, please refer to the section “System Alarm Setup” in the chapter of “System Setup”.
When the alarm setup is Disabling, the alarm relay circuit will stay in the normal state. Activated alarm relay
can be deactivated by pushing the ACO (Alarm Cut-Off) button.

Table 2-5 Alarm Relay Circuit Contact State When Alarm Setup is Enable
Circuit NC + COM NO + COM
Condition
System Power Off Short Open
Alarm On Open Short
Normal State for Auto, Period and Short Open
Manual Mode:
Alarm Cut Off or No Alarm

Table 2-6 Alarm Relay Circuit Contact State When Alarm Setup is Disable
Circuit NC + COM NO + COM
Condition
System Power Off Short Open
System Power On Short Open
Alarm On Short Open

Note: The maximum voltage for the alarm relay is 48Vdc, and the maximum current is 1A.

Figure 2-8 Alarm Relay

2.3.5 Fuse Relay

The fuse relay will be triggered when the condition of the power supply changes (ON/OFF). For example, when
the power is “ON”, NC will open relative to COM, and NO shorted relative to COM. If the fuse in the power
supply card is brown (“OFF”), NC will be shorted relative to COM, and NO will be open relative to COM.

Table 2-7 FUSE Relay Connector

Circuit NC + COM NO + COM
Condition
System Power Off Short Open
System Power On Open Short

CXR Page 24
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

2.3.6 Line Power Option

The line power option only available on G.SHDSL cards which takes 2 DTE slots per card. It is factory installed
option available with -48 Vdc, 125Vdc powered chassis only. Also, Fan tray is required.

CXR Page 25
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

2.4 Card Installation

- Controller, plug-in card, and power modules are hot-swappable.

2.4.1 Controller Card Installation

POWER E1/T1(C) E1/T1(D) CPU-1 CPU-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

E1/ E1/
C C
T1 T1
T T
R R
E1/T1(A) E1/T1(B)
L L

1 2
E1/ E1/
T1 T1

- Two slots for controller card

- Procedure for installing controller card:
Step 1 Take out the controller card from the antistatic bag.
Step 2 Insert the edges of the controller card into the rail guides in corresponded slot.
Step 3 Slide the controller card into the chassis until it stops.
Step 4 Press the controller card into the slot so that the front panel is flush with the chassis. Do not force the
card into the slot because this may damage the pins in the card.
Step 5 Secure the controller card in the chassis by pushing the ejector levers in so it locks in place. Do not
force the ejectors in because this may damage the pins in the card.
Step 6 Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws in the latching chassis in order to secure the card to the
mechanism.

2.4.2 Plug-in Card Installation

POWER E1/T1(C) E1/T1(D) CPU-1 CPU-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

E1/ E1/
C C
T1 T1
T T
R R
E1/T1(A) E1/T1(B)
L L

1 2
E1/ E1/
T1 T1

CXR Page 26
 2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

- Four mini-slots, twelve regular size slots

- Procedure for installing plug-in cards:
Step 1 Take out the plug-in card from the antistatic bag.
Step 2 Insert the edges of the plug-in card into the rail guides in corresponded slot.
Step 3 Slide the plug-in card into the chassis until it stops.
Step 4 Press the plug-in card into the slot so that the front panel is flush with the chassis. Do not force the card
into the slot because this may damage the pins in the card.
Step 5 Secure the plug-in card in the chassis by pushing the ejector levers in so it locks in place. Do not force
the ejectors in because this may damage the pins in the card.
Step 6 Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws in the latching chassis in order to secure the card to the
mechanism.

2.4.3 Card Replacement

There are two main activities for replacing the card for the CXR device: Remove the old card and then install
the new one. Please follow below step-by-step procedures.

Remove the Old Card

Step 1 Locate the old card.
Step 2 Use a screwdriver to loosen the captive screws that secure the card to the chassis.
Step 3 Pull the card out of the chassis.
Note: It may result in static damage when handling the cards. Please utilize an antistatic wrist strap,
static-dissipating work surface, and antistatic bags when dealing with them.

2.4.3.1. Install the New Controller Card

After you remove the old card, follow below steps to install the new controller card.
Step 1 Take out the new controller card from the antistatic bag.
Step 2 Insert the edges of the controller card into the rail guides in corresponded slot.
Step 3 Slide the controller card into the chassis until it stops.
Step 4 Press the controller card into the slot so that the front panel is flush with the chassis.
Step 5 Secure the controller card in the chassis by pushing the ejector levers in so it locks in place. Do not
force the ejectors in because this may damage the pins in the card.
Step 6 Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws in the latching chassis in order to secure the card to the
mechanism.

If user replaces both controller cards at the same time, the new controller card will start with default
configuration.
On the other hand, if the backup controller card is replaced by a new one, and the hardware/firmware/brand of
the new controller card is the same to the working controller card, then the configuration on the new controller
card will synchronize to the working controller card automatically.

2.4.3.2. Dual-CTRL protection

When an QX3440 has two controller cards, on applying power, the left controller (CTRL1) will always be the
primary, and the right controller (CTRL 2) will always be the redundant.

If the redundant card’s configuration is different from the primary, the redundant CTRL will synchronize its
configuration from the primary CTRL after the boot up and initiation process.
This synchronized takes 1-2 minutes. During configuration synchronization, the LED will show the following
sequence

1. LED for primary CTRL: <power> green, <active> flashing green.

2. LED for redundant CTRL: <power> flashing green, <active> dark.
3. LED for redundant CTRL: <Alarm> RED means Redundant version (brand, hardware, or firmware) is different
with Primary

CXR Page 27
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Redundant CTRL will send heart beat every 0.5 second. After 5 consecutive no response from primary CTRL,
meaning primary CTRL dead, redundant CTRL will take over QX3440 and become primary. Primary warm
restart (reset) will not switch control back to the left CTRL, while Primary cold restart will switch. Switching
time is less than 50ms.

Condition:

· The Brand, Hardware and the Firmware version of CTRL1 and CTRL2 MUST be the SAME for
controller protection.
· In Controller Menu, the Redundant Controller shows Enable means the Dual Controller Protection
function is ON.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = C o nt r oller Menu === 09:11:02 08/01/2012

S e r ia l N u mb e r : 1 705 0 7 Redundant Controller: Enable

H a r dw a re Ve r si o n : V er. H Start Time : 15:10:48 07/31/2012
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n : V 8.2 4 . 01 07 / 31 / 2012 Device Name: CXR QX3440

· In Controller Menu, the Redundant Controller shows Disable means Dual Controller Protection
function is not support.
·
C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = C o nt r oller Menu === 09:11:02 08/01/2012

S e r ia l N u mb e r : 1 705 0 7 Redundant Controller: Disabled

H a r dw a re Ve r si o n : V er. H Start Time : 15:10:48 07/31/2012
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n : V 8.2 4 . 01 07 / 31 / 2012 Device Name: CXR QX3440

· Go to Controller Menu > (R) Redundant CTRL Information to check the redundant CTRL info : the
serial number, hardware and software version of the redundant controller card. Both Controllers cards
need to be the same to enable the protection.
·
CXR QX3440 === Redundant Board Information === 09:47:31 10/09/2009

Serial Number : 123542

Hardware Version: Ver.J
Software Version: V8.05.01 09/29/2009

2.4.3.3. Install the New Plug-in Card

After you remove the old card, follow below steps to install the new plug-in card.
Step 1 Take out the new card from the antistatic bag.
Step 2 Insert the edges of the card into the rail guides in corresponded slot.
Step 3 Slide the card into the chassis until it stops.
Step 4 Press the plug-in card into the slot so that the front panel is flush with the chassis.
Step 5 Secure the plug-in card in the chassis by pushing the ejector levers in so it locks in place. Do not force
the ejectors in because this may damage the pins in the card.
Step 6 Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws in the latching chassis in order to secure the card to the
mechanism.

If the same type plug-in card is inserted, no additional configuration changes are required. The QX3440 system
will apply old card’s configuration to the new one automatically. (Note 1)

- Steps to initiate a new plug-in card: go to 6.2.7.5

When a plug-in card is removed and replaced with a plug-in card of a different type, default configuration is
assigned to the new plug-in card. The user must set the configuration for each change of plug-in card type. If
the same type plug-in card is inserted, depending on plug-in card type.

CXR Page 28
 2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

- Steps to initiate a new plug-in card: go to 6.2.7.5

Note 1: Please note that the QX3440 system will NOT apply card’s configuration when new RTA/RTB is inserted;
RTA & RTB would keep the original configuration.

2.4.4 Card Removal

This section guides you how to remove controller cards and plug-in cards.

Step 1 Locate the old card.

Step 2 Use a screwdriver to loosen the captive screws that secure the card to the chassis.
Step 3 Pull the card out of the chassis.
Step 4 Put the old card into the antistatic bag.
Note: It may result in static damage when handling the cards. Please utilize an antistatic wrist strap,
static-dissipating work surface, and antistatic bags when dealing with them.

CXR Page 29
2 Installation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

2.5 Configuration Setting

2.5.1 Software Configuration Setting

There are four system configurations:

· Factory default
· Current working
· User stored
· Link backup

The factory default configurations are not changeable. Each QX3440 is shipped with all three configurations
set to the factory default configuration.

The current working configuration, which can be saved into nonvolatile memory as a user-stored configuration,
can be changed at any time. When the system is reset, the previous configuration will be retrieved as the
current working configuration.

The user-stored configuration can be retrieved at any time. User can retrieve the user-stored configuration to
overwrite the current working configuration. Please refer to the section of Store/ Retrieve Configuration for
the detail operation.

The link backup configuration are the 1:1 and 1+1 protection schemes which only available in single E1/T1,
FOM(mini slot) and 1FOMA (single slot) cards. This occurs when the system is set up so that a backup line (or
lines in the case of 1: n) will be switched into service if the working line fails. Please refer to the section of Link
Backup Function for the detail operation.

CXR Page 30
3 Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

3 Operation
3.1 Quick Start for QX3440
After installation, the user may want to familiarize him with the equipment immediately. The following
abbreviated instructions will give the user a quick start.

3.1.1 Power On

Turn power on by attaching a power cable to the front of the unit.

3.1.2 Load Default

The unit is shipped with factory default setting.

Upon initial power up you will see the following screen on your VT-100 monitor. The QX3440 will automatically
load the system hardware configuration stored in the flash memory. If you prefer to load the factory default
configuration press the ACO button during the countdown (ie. 3….2…1).

B o a rd _ Sl o t= 0
P r e ss AC O k e y t o l o ad d e fa u lt co n fi guration...3...2...1...
I n i t S ys t em Co n f ig u rat i o n. . .. . Lo a d Previous
T e s t M AP RA M . . . .. O K
I n i t T SI 90 8 20 . . .. .
R e d un d an t b o ar d . .. . .
E n d t a sk Pr o cH b D at a ... . . .
e v R ed T oP r i h ap p e ne d du r i ng in i ti a li zation......
R e d un d an t -> P ri m a ry tak e o ve r !
R - S yc = 0, R -I n it = 1 P = 0,S = 0 00 0 C h kE r =0 000 ErCnt=0000 CmdSycEr=00 HBcnt=0000 [000]
T e s ti n g a nd In i t D M 900 0 - E th e rn e t controller...OK!
I n i t S CC 1 - HD L C p o rt . . .
I n i t R S4 8 5 S CC 4 . ..
T r i gg e r a ll Ta s k .. .
E n a bl e R S 48 5 a n d E t her n e t . ..
I n i t M as t er Cl o c k . ..

3.1.3 Using Front Panel

There is no front panel on the QX3440. A hand-held LCD device is available now and applies to some selective
plug-in cards. This device will allow configuration of and access to the various features without the need of a
VT100 terminal. More detail, please refer to LCD manual.

Note: Order separately for the hand-held LCD device.

3.1.3.1. Review of Default Settings

All the default settings can be reviewed or changed. This is done by selecting the menu item. Either a
sub-menu is shown or the selected setting is indicated with an asterisk.

3.1.3.2. Map Setup

Connect a VT100 terminal to the Console port. Press <o> to logon, then press <s> for system setup. Move the
cursor to <c> TSI MAP Setup. The TSI MAP Setup screen shows up.

To change the settings, use arrow keys to select time slot. Press <Tab> to change the port values and enter
numbers for the time slot. Press <Esc> to exit the TSI map.

CXR Page 31
3 Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

3.1.3.3. DS1

Next, adjust the DS1 settings.

3.1.3.4. Unit Selection

To review or change Slot settings, press <U> Choose a Slot from the main menu.

3.1.4 Using Terminal

To use the RS232 interface to configure the unit, connect a VT-100 terminal to the CONSOLE (button down/
button up) connector using a null modem cable. The VT-100 terminal can be a PC running a VT-100 emulator
software.

Upon connection, press ENTER and ESC alternately to bring the main menu into view.

Press O (Log On) to see the full menu.

Press S (System Setup) to review or change the configuration.

3.1.5 Configuration Settings

The entire configuration is shown when S -> System Setup is pressed. To change any setting, use the arrow
keys to move to the target setting. Then press the TAB key repeatedly to cycle to the desired setting for any
selected parameter.

3.2 System Operation

3.2.1 Date

QX3440 is equipped with a RTC (Real Time Clock). User can change the current date and time as necessary.
RTC also can manage leap year. To save RTC battery life, the RTC is activated by the manufacturer just
before shipping. The RTC battery has a 10 years power-off life cycle.

3.2.2 Master Clock

This product has a system clock PLL (Phase Lock Loop) which may be phase locked to the DS1 line clock or
internal clock. The default master is the DS1 line clock. The default value is “Internal”.

NOTE: If no DS1 line clock is available, QX3440 will automatically switch to the internal clock
source. QX3440 will automatically switch back to the DS1 line clock when plug-in card
plug-in.

3.2.3 Console Port

The console port allows the user either to use a local VT-100 terminal via DB9 connector or use a remote
VT-100 terminal via modem for system configuration, diagnostics, polling status reports, etc. The console port
baud, data bit length, stop bit length, and parity bit length, XON-XOFF flow control, and interface type are as
shown below.
Table 3-1 Console Port Setting
Item Fixed Setting
Baud 9600
Data Length 8-Bits
Stop Bit 1-Bit
Parity Bit NONE
XON-XOFF OFF

CXR Page 32
3 Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

3.2.4 Menu Lock

The terminal is used to read alarms, system configurations, and system status. It also can be used to change
system configurations and clear the alarm queue, etc. By enabling the menu-lock, only read operations are
allowed. Modifications to the current status are not allowed. Users may not change system configurations or
clear performance data.

 Password and menu-clock options are disabled by default

 The default password is cxr.

3.2.5 Logon, Logoff, and Password

Logoff prevents system configuration changes at the terminal, while logon allows system configuration
changes. The password feature is used to augment lock control against unauthorized terminal users from
changing system parameters from the terminal. With password enabled, logon requires entering the correct
password. If password is disabled, no password is required to logon.

 The default option of the password is disabled.

 The default password is cxr.

If password is enabled, users must enter the password when logging in to gain the privilege to change system
configurations by the terminal. To change the password for the first time, enter the default password when
prompted for the old password.

3.3 Alarms and Reports

3.3.1 Alarms

QX3440 has many types of alarm. This includes system to control all of alarm, as listed in Tables below. Also,
QX3440 has alarm queue which record the latest 300 alarms with time stamp. Alarm queue support controller
switched. QX3440 also has alarm history and alarm status registers which is used to track the alarm count.
Each alarm can be individually enabled or disabled. When disabled, no action is taken. When enabled, alarm
counter increments on the occurrence of the specific type of alarm. When alarm occurs or the counter
threshold exceeds, alarm is triggered.

When alarm is triggered, a relay is activated if it is enabled. Otherwise, no action is taken and only the specific
alarm count is incremented. When threshold level is implemented, it is based on the 15 minutes alarm count
register.

All alarms are disabled by default. The relay is also disabled by default.

Table 3-2 Alarm Action Table

Alarm Action Description Alarm Severity
Alarm enable or disable all alarm/event (include plug-in card alarm Disable/Enable
Relay enable or disable relay while alarm occurs. Disable/Manual/Auto
Alarm Cut Off issue alarm to Management if "alarm cut off" key pressed. Disable/Enable

CXR Page 33
3 Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Table 3-3 System Alarm Type Table

Alarm Type Alarm Description Alarm Severity
Port Inactive alarm control for: Disable/major/minor/critical
a. slot inactive: pull out plug-in card or plug-in card
failed.
b. redundant loss: redundant controller card pull out or
failed.
c. redundant checksum error: checksum error while
transmit data from primary to redundant.
d. redundant unsync: redundant SW is not same
with primary controller card.
Port Start-up alarm control for: Disable/major/minor/critical
a. slot startup: plug in plug-in card.
b. primary startup: first startup controller card.
c. redundant insert: redundant controller card inserted.
d. redundant to primary: redundant controller card
become to primary if primary controller card loss.
Clock Loss alarm control for clock loss (line clock or external clock). Disable/major/minor/critical
Link Switch alarm control for link switch in e1/t1 protection Disable/major/minor/critical
mechanism.
Map Switch alarm control for map switch (timing switch) Disable/major/minor/critical
mechanism.
Power Alarm alarm control for: Disable/major/minor/critical
a. power fail: power plug-in card failed.
b. fan fail: fan failed.
c. power consumption: power over load.
Type Mismatch alarm control for: Disable/major/minor/critical
a. plug-in card type mismatch: if plug in plug-in card
different with previous record.
b. link change: if link ID different with previous record.

Note:
disable: no alarm issue.
major: issue major alarm and enable major relay (if enabled).
minor: issue minor alarm and enable miner relay (if enabled).
critical: issue critical alarm and enable major relay (if enabled).

CXR Page 34
3 Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Table 3-4 Alarm Type Numbers

Alarm Type
Unit Alarm Type Alarm Description
Number
Alarm cut off 0
Slot inactive 1
Slot startup 2
Clock loss 3
Primary start 4
Redundant loss 5
Backup switch 6
Power failure 7
Redundant checksum error 8
Fan failure 9
Controller
TSI map switch 10
LINK_PROTECTION_ALARM 11
REDUNDANT_INSERT_ALARM 12
REDUNDANT_UNSYNC_ALARM 13
REDUNDANT_TO_PRIMARY_ALARM 14
PLUG-IN
15
CARD_TYPE_MISMATCH_ALARM
LINK_ID_MISMATCH_ALARM 16
POWER_CONSUMPTION_ALARM 17
SSM_CLOCK_SWITCH_ALARM 18
RAI Remote Alarm Indication 21
AIS Alarm Indication Signal 22
LOS Loss of Signal 23
LOF Loss of Frame 24
E1 card
BPV Bipolar Violation 25
ES Error Second 26
UAS Unavailable Second 27
CSS Control Slip Second 28
YEL Yellow Alarm 21
AIS Alarm Indication Signal 22
LOS Loss of Signal 23
LOF Loss of Frame 24
T1 card
BPV Bipolar Violation 25
ES Error Second 26
UAS Unavailable Second 27
CSS Control Slip Second 28

Note: If Redundant Loss and Redundant Insert are a pair, the alarm condition will be cleared when Redundant
Insert occurs after Redundant Loss. If Slot no work and Slot start are a pair, the alarm condition will be cleared
when Slot start occurs after Slot no work.

3.3.2 Reports

For DS1 line receiver, QX3440 has three sets of performance registers. These are line, user, and far-end. The
line performance register tracks the DS1 line receiver performance status. The user performance register
tracks the DS1 line receiver as well, but user may clear at any time. The far-end performance register tracks
the far-end DS1 receiver status. The performance parameters are listed in Table below. User performance
register have an additional parameter, CSS (controlled slip second).
Each performance parameter has ninety six sets of registers to record 24 hours history in 15 minute intervals.

CXR Page 35
3 Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Table 3-5 Performance Parameter List

Performance Description Definition Definition
Parameter 2 Frame/Multiframe 16 Frame/Multiframe
ES Error Second BPV1, OOF1, or CRC6 ERROR  1, OOF
CS1. 1, or CS 1.
BES Bursty Error 1 < BPV < 2048 1 < CRC6 < 860
Second
SES Severe Error BPV  2048, or OOF  CRC6  860, or OOF  1
Second 1
DM Degraded Minute BPV 123 CRC6  47
LOFC Loss Of Frame OOF for 2.5  0.5 sec OOF for 2.5  0.5 sec
Count
UAS Unavailable  10 consecutive SES  10 consecutive SES
Second
CSS Controlled Slip frame slip  1 frame slip  1
Second

Table lists below the types of reports available, performance parameters provided by each report, and the
reset commands for each report.

Table 3-6 Performance Report Options

Report Type Category Report
[Menu Command] ES UAS BES SES CSS LOFC
Front Panel Reports USER [Network] Y Y Y Y Y Y
1-Hour Terminal USER [Network] Y Y Y Y Y Y
Reports LINE [Network] N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C
Menu Option [1] FAR-END N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C
24-Hour Terminal USER [Network] Y Y Y Y Y Y
Reports LINE [Network] N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C
Menu Option [2] FAR-END N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C N/C
CRC Error Count USER [Network]      
Terminal Reports LINE [Network]      
Menu Option [E] FAR-END      
Y = Report available and can be cleared by admin terminal
command “Y”.
N/C = No clear. Report available, but counts cannot be cleared by the user.
─ = Report not available.

CXR Page 36
3 Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

3.4 LED Operation

The front of the QX3440 has LEDs for operation and error indications. The indication can be in one or more
colors. Note that when powering up and self-test is in progress, the unit front panel LEDs are also used to
indicate fault conditions.

Table 3-7 Front-Panel LED Table (DS1, DTE)

LED Color Indication
Off Power off
POWER
Green Power on and operational
Primary Controller Card
Off Power off
Power
Green Power on and operational
Off Controller card fails
Active
Flashing Green Normal
Off Normal or alarm disable
Alarm
Red Alarm
Redundant Controller Card
C Off Power off
P Power Power on and act as redundant controller
U Flashing Green
card.
Active Off Normal
Off Normal
Redundant controller card board is
Red  Off
Alarm synchronizing to primary controller card
board.  The synchronization is done.
Red Redundant version is different with Primary
NOTE: Active led is used to identify primary controller card.
If the color of Active led is flashing green, then this controller card is primary.

3.5 Telnet Connectivity

To manage the system from internet, QX3440 controller offers Telnet connectivity and SSH (Secure Shell) to
allow user access to the QX3440 controller from any workstation in the network. SSH (Secure Shell) is a
network protocol that allows data to be exchanged over a secure channel between two computers. Encryption
provides confidentiality and integrity of data. SSH uses public-key cryptography to authenticate the remote
computer and allow the remote computer to authenticate the user, if necessary.

There are two interfaces for Telnet function, one is Ethernet port, and the other is in-band port (in-band
management). To use Ethernet interface, use Ethernet/RJ45 port at back panel to connect with Ethernet
network directly. Ethernet and in band port cannot be used at the same time.

To use the Telnet function, make sure IP Address, and Interface parameters are matched.

Once the IP parameters are set, users can verify that the QX3440 is operating properly by using the ping
command to check for a response from QX3440:

$ping 192.1.100.45
192.1.100.45 is active

The Telnet utility simulates VT-100 to connect with the QX3440 controller. The controller main menu of
terminal screen described at Chapter 6 will be displayed after Telnet connection is established. Refer to
Chapter 6 to manage QX3440 controller. QX3440 controller can maintain 4 Telnet connections simultaneously
but only one to log-on at one time.

CXR Page 37
3 Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

3.6 Embedded SNMP Agent

The embedded SNMP agent for QX3440 offers standard RFC 1213 MIB II and RFC 1406 DS1 MIB as well as
CXR's enterprise MIB. Network manager can use any SNMP compatible network management system such
as Hewlett-Packard's HP Open View to monitor and control QX3440.
Please refer to each respective SNMP manager operation instruction to incorporate the QX3440 enterprise
MIB to the system.

E1
QX3440

Telnet
Station E1 Router
QX3440

Ethernet

Figure 3-1 HDLC using E1 router

3.7 In-Band Management Setup

In addition to the console port and the Ethernet port, QX3440 can also allow remote management through a 64
Kbps time slot from the network line. To achieve remote management using this “in-band” technique, two steps
are necessary.

First, the Ethernet connection of the remote management terminal must be inserted to a designated time slot in
the network. This time slot can be a DS0 channel in a E1 or T1 line, or a DS0 channel in any of the broadband
facilities, such as E3, DS3, STM1, or OC3. This can be achieved through a router-CSU/DSU-mux series of
equipment or in one step through a router interface on a QX3440.

LAN QX3440 QX3440

64 Kbps
E1/ T1 E1/ T1 E1/ T1
Router E1/ T1 NETWORK E1/ T1

In-Band Insertion In-Band Extraction

Management
Terminal

Next, the equipment to be management, namely this QX3440 must extract this 64 Kbps time slot to the
management port. This is accomplished through the TSI screen.

Note: Please refer to Appendix B Inband Management for detail.

CXR Page 38
3 Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Table 3-8 Error Message Table

The error messages defined here should be corresponded to the error codes.

Error Code Error Description

ERROR01 A loopback is in effect
ERROR02 LCD operation is locked
ERROR03 Channel is already in use
ERROR04 can't be in TTM if MCLK=DTE
ERROR05 DTEn is in TTM or speed is 0
ERROR06 Line unsync
ERROR07 No channel is assigned
ERROR08 Please select speed first
ERROR09 A test is in progress
ERROR10 DTE loopback is in progress
ERROR11 Please reduce speed first
ERROR12 Illegal Date/Time format
ERROR13 the DTE1 channel should be B2
ERROR14 the DTE1 channel should be B1+B2
ERROR15 the DTE1 channel should be B1
ERROR16 the DTE1 channel should be B1/B2
ERROR17 Remote doesn't have this function
ERROR18 Remote unit rejected this request
ERROR19 Remote unit didn’t respond
ERROR20 Remote DTE1 TTM should be off
ERROR21 the DTE1 channel should be IDLE
ERROR22 the DTE1 is not installed
ERROR23 undefined response
ERROR24 the unit didn't response
ERROR25 speed can't be zero if MCLK=DTEn
ERROR26 the unit is not installed
ERROR27 ESF or ESF&T1.403 mode is required
ERROR28 ESF&T1.403 mode is required
ERROR29 E1 CRC and FDL must set to be on
ERROR30 LLB or LOCAL LOOPBACK activated
ERROR31 EOC is not ready
ERROR32 Current slot is not HDSL plug-in card
ERROR33 Current slot is not DTE plug-in card
ERROR34 Not enough channels
ERROR35 Slot need to download firmware
ERROR36 Time slot conflict
ERROR37 Reserved for future use
ERROR38 Reserved for future use
ERROR39 Reserved for future use
ERROR40 Reserved for future use
ERROR41 Reserved for future use

CXR Page 39
4 Maintenance QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

4 Maintenance

4.1 Self-Test

When the QX3440 is powered up, a complete self-test routine is run to check all I/O ports, read/write memory,
and data paths to validate system integrity.

4.2 Diagnostics

Diagnostics for QX3440 covers Loopback and Test Pattern. Generally, the Loopback functions might be very
in different type of plug-in cards. Please go to individual plug-in card manual for detail info.

4.3 Near End Loopback

The near end loopbacks such as local loopback, line loopback, payload loopback, DTE loopback, are activated
by the QX3440. The loopbacks are at the near end facility.

NOTE: Deactivate the near-end loopbacks from the terminal, depending on where it was activated.

4.4 Far End Loopback

Far-end loopbacks (remote line loopback, remote payload loopback, remote channel loopback, and DTE
loopback) can be activated by the local QX3440 to cause a remote loopback commands to the far-end facility.

4.5 Test Pattern

To test the DS1 line, four test patterns are available to determine faults such as deficient clock recovery, fault
ALBO level recovery, inadequate jitter margin, presence of bridge taps, and mis-optioned network interface.
These four patterns are framed pattern with proper DS1 frame pattern as described in the following paragraph.

4.6 Verifying QX3440 Operations

The purpose of this section is not to help the user determine where a possible fault in the network may lie. For
this, the user needs to know the exact geometry of the network. Then standard network trouble shooting
procedures should be followed, which involve sectionalizing the network and performing loopback tests on
pieces of the network.

The purpose here is to help the user determine whether the QX3440 equipment is at fault after tests have
pointed a suspicious finger at this equipment. The procedures outlined here depend on test equipment and
other equipment the user may have on hand.

The organization of these procedures starts from the simple to the complex. The procedure ends when a
definitive conclusion is made that the QX3440 equipment is at fault. To verify that the QX3440 equipment is not
at fault, specialized equipment such as a BERT (bit error rate test) set is needed.

CXR Page 40
4 Maintenance QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

4.6.1 Quick Test

4.6.1.1. LCD/Display

LCD is currently available.

4.6.1.2. Independent Test

Remove all line and interface connections to QX3440. Remove power. After a few seconds, re-apply power.
Observe the power-up self-test sequence. If this fails, then QX3440 has failed. See if the LEDs show any
abnormal displays. If yes, use the LED indications to guide the user to test other parts of the network, such as
the E1 line, or interface plug-in.

Especially during initial installation, excessive errors may be due to (a) incorrect configuration of either QX3440
or of the equipment at the other end of the line, or (b) due to faulty line installation, which results in excessive
noise, cross talk, or impedance mismatch. Especially in electrically noisy environments, such as central offices,
use of shielded cables is mandatory.

4.6.2 Substitution

If a spare QX3440 plug-in is available, then replace the working one with the spare. The user must carefully
configure the spare exactly as the working one. If the substitution clears the problem, then the original working
one is suspect. Note that this is not definitive as other reasons may cause the same symptom. A good practice
is to reconfigure the original one and swap once more.

If both units behave the same, then the problem is probably elsewhere.

4.6.3 Using Loopback Plugs

Without a spare, loopback plugs are handy for diagnosis. Note that internal loopback facilities of the QX3440
do not include the interface circuitry. Thus a set of plugs, one for each of the interfaces, line and DTE, are
needed for complete tests. These plugs are wired such that signals from the QX3440 are loopback by hard
wire back to the receive pin of the same plug.

Replace the line connector with a loopback plug. Observe if the line is in sync. If not then QX3440 has failed.
Then perform a BERT test towards the line. If this fails, then QX3440 has failed.

For the DTE interfaces, a loopback plug must be used in concert with a far end QX3440 if such a terminal is
available, then a PRBS test will determine if that DTE interface is at fault.

Note that if a far end terminal is available, the first test should be a local line loopback to see if the line is good.
If tests with loopback plug all pass, then the problem is probably elsewhere.

4.6.4 Using Bert Test Set

If a BERT (bit error rate test) set and another QX3440 are available, such as the Fireberd 6000, then a
comprehensive suite of test are available to examine the health of the QX3440. If another QX3440 is not
available, use of the loopback plugs would provide some of the tests otherwise possible.

With a BERT, each of the ports of the QX3440 can be tested individually. The user must configure the BERT in
the exact way the QX3440 is configured. This is easily done by comparing each of the options one by one.
After checking that the configuration matches, if any one of the ports fails, then QX3440 has failed.

CXR Page 41
5 Front Panel Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

5 Front Panel Operation

5.1 Refer to QX3440 LCD separate Manual

For detail of QX3440 LCD chapter, please see QX3440 LCD separate Manual.

CXR Page 42
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

6 Terminal Operation
QX3440 provides comprehensive report and enhanced configuration capability through the console port on the
front panel. Using single-character commands and arrow keys, the QX3440, including all of its ports, can be
configured and monitored through the use of a VT-100 terminal. The single-character commands are not case
sensitive. On each screen, the available commands and the configurable fields are highlighted.

When a VT-100 terminal is connected to the CONSOLE of front panel, make sure the button is up, upon power
up, a main menu is shown. The main menu consists of three groups of commands, Display, Log, Setup, and
MISC. Initially only Display and Access commands are available. To enable Setup and MISC, user has to log
on using the "O" command, after which the full screen is shown.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = C o nt r oller Menu === 09:11:02 08/01/2012

S e r ia l N u mb e r : 1 705 0 7 Redundant Controller: Disabled

H a r dw a re Ve r si o n : V er. H Start Time : 15:10:48 07/31/2012
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n : V 8.2 4 . 01 07 / 31 / 2012 Device Name: CXR QX3440

[ D I SP L AY ] [SETUP]
C - > S ys t em Co n f ig u rat i o n S - > System Setup
B - > C lo c k s ou r c e C onf i g ur a ti o n M - > System Alarm Setup
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e S u mma r y W - > Firmware Transfer
I - > I nf o rm a ti o n S u mma r y V - > Store/Retrieve Configuration
R - > R ed u nd a nt C TR L In f o rm a ti o n K - > Clock source Setup
P - > P er f or m an c e R e por t T - > Bit Error Rate Test

[ L O G] [MISC]
F - > L og Of f A - > Alarm Cut Off
O - > L og On X - > Clear Alarm Queue
U - > C ho o se a S l ot Y - > Controller Return to Default
Z - > Controller Reset

> > S PA C E b ar to r ef r esh o r e nt e r a command ===>

If the password option is turned on, a prompt asking for username and password are shown.

U S E RN A ME : A D MI N P AS S WORD: XXXX

With the password option is turned on, only after a valid password is entered, the full menu is shown, otherwise
user is asked to enter the correct password again.

> > I nv a li d i n pu t of pas s w or d ! Tr y again ?[Y/N]

If password is correctly entered, or if the password option is OFF, the full controller main menu is shown.
Otherwise, only display menu items will be shown, which are in the lower left half of the screen.

A Radius client function is available for user to login by the account number registered at Radius Serer. Detail
setup refers RADIUS Setup section under System Setup.

CXR Page 43
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

6.1 Menu Tree

A -> SNMP System Setup
A -> System B -> V1: Trap Setup
System S -> SNMP Setup C -> V3: User-Based Security Model Setup
B -> Password D -> V3: View-Based Access Control Model Setup 1
H -> TELNET/SSH Setup E -> V3: View-Based Access Control Model Setup 2
I -> Unit Init/Clear F -> V3: Target & Notify Setup

C -> TSI Map Setup

Map D -> Select a New TSI Map
S -> System Setup
E -> Copy a TSI Map to Another
F -> Clear a TSI Map

G -> Link Backup Function

Protection Q -> QDS1 1:1 Protection
K -> DS0-SNCP Setup
R -> PDH Ring Protection
T -> PDH Ring Diagnostic
M -> Inband Protection
[Setup]
L -> Command Line
N -> SNTP Setup
Other U -> SYSLOG Setup
P -> Power Setup
V -> RADIUS Setup

M -> System Alarm Setup A -> Download Mainboard Firmware

W -> Firmware Transfer C -> Download Configuration
D -> Upload Configuration
E -> Download Mainboard Boot-up
R -> Copy Firmware to Redundant
V -> Store/Retrieve Configuration
K -> Clock source Setup
T -> Bit Error Rate Test

A -> System
B -> Clock Source
C -> System Configuration C -> TSI map
[DISPLAY] D -> Current TSI map
E -> Power/Fan Status

G -> Link Backup Function

Q -> QDS1 1:1 Protection
K -> DS0-SNCP Status
R -> PDH Ring Protection Status
M -> Inband protection Status
B -> Clock source Configuration S -> Activation Status
Q -> Alarm Queue Summary
I -> Information Summary
R -> Redundant CTRL Information
P -> Performance Report A -> DS0-SNCP Performance

Figure 6-1 QX3440 Controller: Menu Tree

Note: “PDH Ring Protection” and “PDH Ring Diagnostic” are optional functions. To access these two optional
functions, you must order the PDH Ring software separately, or these two functions will not show on the VT100
menu.

CXR Page 44
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

6.2 Main Menu

The Controller Menu for the QX3440 is shown below. Press O to log on. You will be asked for a user name
and a password. Two default user: one is ADMIN; and the other is OPERATOR. Both default passwords are
cxr (case sensitive).

Note: Default user names and default password must be keyed in using upper case letters.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = C o nt r oller Menu === 09:11:02 08/01/2012

S e r ia l N u mb e r : 1 705 0 7 Redundant Controller: Disabled

H a r dw a re Ve r si o n : V er. H Start Time : 15:10:48 07/31/2012
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n : V 8.2 4 . 01 07 / 31 / 2012 Device Name: CXR QX3440

[ D I SP L AY ] [SETUP]

[ L O G] [MISC]
F - > L og Of f
O - > L og On

> > S PA C E b ar to r ef r esh o r e nt e r a command ===>

If you log in as ADMIN, key in the password and then press the Enter key, the following full-menu screen will
appear. It allows access to all functions on both display and setup screens.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = C o nt r oller Menu === 09:11:02 08/01/2012

S e r ia l N u mb e r : 1 705 0 7 Redundant Controller: Disabled

H a r dw a re Ve r si o n : V er. H Start Time : 15:10:48 07/31/2012
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n : V 8.2 4 . 01 07 / 31 / 2012 Device Name: CXR QX3440

[ D I SP L AY ] [SETUP]
C - > S ys t em Co n f ig u rat i o n S - > System Setup
B - > C lo c k s ou r c e C onf i g ur a ti o n M - > System Alarm Setup
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e S u mma r y W - > Firmware Transfer
I - > I nf o rm a ti o n S u mma r y V - > Store/Retrieve Configuration
R - > R ed u nd a nt C TR L In f o rm a ti o n K - > Clock source Setup
P - > P er f or m an c e R e por t T - > Bit Error Rate Test

[ L O G] [MISC]
F - > L og Of f A - > Alarm Cut Off
O - > L og On X - > Clear Alarm Queue
U - > C ho o se a S l ot Y - > Controller Return to Default
Z - > Controller Reset

> > S PA C E b ar to r ef r esh o r e nt e r a command ===>

CXR Page 45
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

If you log in as OPERATOR, key in the password and then press the Enter key, the following menu screen will
appear. It allows access to all functions on both display and setup screens.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = C o nt r oller Menu === 09:11:02 08/01/2012

S e r ia l N u mb e r : 1 705 0 7 Redundant Controller: Disabled

H a r dw a re Ve r si o n : V er. H Start Time : 15:10:48 07/31/2012
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n : V 8.2 4 . 01 07 / 31 / 2012 Devi ce Name: CXR QX3440

[ D I SP L AY ] [SETUP]
C - > S ys t em Co n f ig u rat i o n
B - > C lo c k s ou r c e C onf i g ur a ti o n
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e S u mma r y
I - > I nf o rm a ti o n S u mma r y
R - > R ed u nd a nt C TR L In f o rm a ti o n
P - > P er f or m an c e R e por t

[ L O G] [MISC]
F - > L og Of f
O - > L og On
U - > C ho o se a S l ot

> > S PA C E b ar to r ef r esh o r e nt e r a command ===>

Note: If the terminal screen is illegible, press the "Enter" and "Esc" key alternatively to bring up the main menu.
This is particularly needed if the terminal is connected to the controller while the power is already applied. If the
main menu still fails to appear, check to see that the terminal is configured as 9600, 8, n, 1, and that a proper
null modem or a null modem cable is used.

6.2.1 System Configuration

Press “C” from the Controller Menu, the screen of System Configuration will show as below.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = Co n tr o ll e r Configuration === 17:00:50 04/17/2014

A -> S y stem
B -> C l ock Source
C -> T S I map
D -> C u rrent TSI map
E -> P o wer/Fan Status

G -> L i nk Backup Function

Q -> E 1 /T1 Port Protection
K -> D S 0- SNCP Status
R -> P D H Ring Protection Status
M -> I n band Protection Status
S -> A c tivation Status

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n Menu or enter a command >>

Note: “PDH Ring Protection Status” only available when the “PDH Ring” software has purchased.
You must order the PDH Ring software separately, or these related functions will not show on the
VT100 menu.

6.2.1.1. System

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (A) System

The System Configuration shows the current status of device name, network, console port, TSI map, and
clock

CXR Page 46
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S ys t em Configuration === 17:17:45 08/03/2011

[ S y st e m]
D e v ic e N a me : C XR QX3 4 4 0

[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: R OU T ER
NI E N IP A dd r e ss S u bn e tM a sk Frame LB Timer
L A N : ON 01 0 .0 0 3 .0 2 3.0 9 5 2 5 5. 2 55 . 000.000 Ethernet
W A N : O FF 01 0 .0 0 4 .0 0 1.0 0 1 2 5 5. 2 55 . 255.000 HDLC 1
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: LAN G a te w ay IPAddr: 000.000.000.000
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D
[ C O NS O LE po r t]
B a u d R at e : 9 60 0
D a t a L en g th : 8 -B i ts
S t o p B it : 1 -B i t
P a r it y : N ON E
X O N _X O FF : X OF F

[ T S I m ap ] [Clock]
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : 1(B i d ir e ct i on ) Cloc k Mode : Normal
I d l e S ig n al l in g : 1 0 10

< < ES C k e y t o r e tu r n t o pr e vi o us menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

Note: NI = Network Interface, EN = Enable (DIS=Disable), LB Timer = Loopback Timer

Clock Mode: Normal and SSM (Synchronous Status Message)

6.2.1.2. Clock Source

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (B) Clock Source

Normal Mode

The screen of Clock Source Setup will show as below. Note that the external clock type in this example is E1.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == Clo c k S o ur c e S tatus (Normal Mode) === 18:19:18 08/03/201 4

M a s te r _C l k S ou r c e : IN T E RN A L Clock Hold -Over: OFF

S e c on d _C l k S ou r c e : IN T E RN A L Hold -Over State: Normal
C u r re n t C lo c k : MA S T ER _ CL K Frame Pulse Period: 8001.2 Hz
C l k _R e co v er _ Mo d e : MA N U AL
C l o ck St a tu s : NO R M AL
E x t . C lo c k T yp e : E1 ( 7 5o h m)
D u a l E xt e rn a l C l oc k Pr o t ec t io n : Disable

< < ES C k e y t o r e tu r n t o pr e vi o us menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = C l o ck So u rc e Status (SSM Mode) === 10:00:17 08/18/2014

F ir s t C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _1 P1 [ Tx_Sabit: F , Rx_Sabit: 2 ]
S e co n d C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _2 P1 Static SSM
T hi r d C lo c k S o ur c e : N ON E
C u rr e nt C lo c k : F IR S T_ C LK
C lo c k S t at u s : N OR M AL
SS M S e nd ( he x ) : 2

[ S t at i c S SM me s s ag e ]
I n t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
L i ne Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x te r na l Cl o ck T y pe : E 1 (7 5 ohm)

C lo c k H ol d - Ov e r : O FF
H ol d -O v er S ta t e : N or m al
F ra m e P ul s e P e ri o d : 8 00 1 .2 Hz

CXR Page 47
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

< < ES C k e y t o r e tu r n t o pr e vi o u s menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

Note:
1. When the option of Clock Hold-Over is ON and the current clock is MASTER_CLK, the Hold-Over State
in the screen will show “NORMAL”. When clock source loss occurs, the Hold-Over State in the screen
will show “Hold-Over”.
2. Make sure the external clock type corresponds to the physical card type. If the system is linked to T1 but
the “Ext. Clock Type” is set to E1, setup failure may occur.

The sample screen below shows a T1 clock type.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == Clo c k S o ur c e S tatus (Normal Mode) === 18:19:18 08/03/201 4

M a s te r _C l k S ou r c e : IN T E RN A L Clock Hold -Over: OFF

S e c on d _C l k S ou r c e : IN T E RN A L Hold -Over State: Normal
C u r re n t C lo c k : MA S T ER _ CL K Frame Pulse Period: 8001.2 Hz
C l k _R e co v er _ Mo d e : MA N U AL
C l o ck St a tu s : NO R M AL
E x t . C lo c k T yp e : T1
D u a l E xt e rn a l C l oc k Pr o t ec t io n : Disable

< < ES C k e y t o r e tu r n t o pr e vi o us menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

3. The TDM clock recovered from each tributary ports on the TDMoE card can be used as QX3440 System
Clock Source. When the TDMoE port clock is selected as Master and/or Second clock source, it refers
to the bundle clock from the TDMoE tributary E1/T1 ports instead of the physical Ethernet ports.

The sample screen below shows the clock source setup with TDMoE card plugged in Slot_1 on the QX3440.
The Master clock source “Slot_1 P1” refers to the clock recovered from the trib_1 on the TDMoE card, and the
Second clock source “Slot_1 P2” refers to the clock recovered from the trib_2 on the TDMoE card.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = C lo c k So urce Setup === 15 : 37: 1 6 0 5 /0 6 /20 14

M a s te r _C l k S ou r c e : Sl o t _1 P1 Clock Hold -Over: OFF

S e c on d _C l k S ou r c e : Sl o t _1 P2 Hold -Over State: Normal
C u r re n t C lo c k : MA S T ER _ CL K Frame P ulse Period: 8001.2 Hz
C l k _R e co v er _ Mo d e : MA N U AL
C l o ck St a tu s : NO R M AL
E x t . C lo c k T yp e : E1 ( 7 5o h m)
D u a l E xt e rn a l C l oc k Pr o t ec t io n : Disable

< < ES C k e y t o r e tu r n t o pr e vi o us menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

SSM Mode with Clock Hold-Over Function is ON

The Clock Source Setup is SSM Mode and the Clock Hold-Over Function is ON. This function will hold the
last loss clock source.

CXR Page 48
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

The sample below shows three clock sources are loss started from First, Second and to Third. The Hold-Over
State showed Hold Over means the current clock will use the third clock source even the third clock source is
loss.

The current clock is in First_Clock: Slot_1 P1 which means port 1 of slot 1. The clock status shows normal and
clock hold-over is off.

Note: The clock hold-over function is supported in E1, T1, and G.shdsl cards.
C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = C l o ck So u rc e Setup (SSM Mode) === 09:59:55 08/18/2014
A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e o ptions by TAB, or by typing

F ir s t C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _1 P1 (Dynamic SSM)
S e co n d C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _2 P1 (Static SSM)
T hi r d C lo c k S o ur c e : N ON E
C u rr e nt C lo c k : F IR S T_ C LK
C lo c k S t at u s : N OR M AL
C lo c k H ol d - Ov e r : O FF

[ S t at i c S SM me s s ag e ]
I n t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
L i ne Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x te r na l Cl o ck T y pe : E 1 (7 5 ohm)

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

When first clock is loss, it will switch to second clock source. The clock status shows normal and clock
hold-over is off.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = C l o ck So u rc e Setup (SS M Mode) === 14:19:59 8 /17/2014

F i r st C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _1 P1 (Dynamic SSM)
S e c on d C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _1 P2 (Static SSM)
T h i rd C lo c k S o ur c e : E XT E RN A L
C u r re n t C lo c k : S EC O ND _ CL K
C l o ck S ta t us : N OR M AL
C lo c k H ol d - Ov e r : O FF

[ S t at i c S SM me s s ag e ]
I n t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
L i n e C lo c k S SM M es s age : B
E x t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a g e : B
E x t er n al Cl o ck T yp e : E 1 (7 5 ohm)

< < ES C k e y t o r e tu r n t o pr e vi o us menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

When second clock is loss, it will switch to third clock source. The clock status shows normal and clock
hold-over is off.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = C l o ck So u rc e S etup (SSM Mode) === 14:20:23 8 /17/2014

F i r st C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _1 P1 (Dynamic SSM)
S e c on d C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _1 P2 (Static SSM)
T h i rd C lo c k S o ur c e : E XT E RN A L
C u r re n t C lo c k : T HI R D_ C LK
C l o ck S ta t us : N OR M AL
C lo c k H ol d - Ov e r : O FF

[ S t at i c S SM me s s ag e ]
I n t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
L i n e C lo c k S SM M es s age : B
E x t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x t er n al Cl o ck T yp e : E 1 (7 5 ohm)

< < ES C k e y t o r e tu r n t o pr e vi o us menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

CXR Page 49
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

When third clock is loss, the Hold-Over function is active and the Hold-Over State shows Hold-Over. The
current clock stays in Third Clock Source.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = C l o ck So u rc e Setup (SSM Mode) === 14:20:48 8 /17/2014

F i r st C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _1 P1 (Dynamic SSM)
S e c on d C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _1 P2 (Static SSM)
T h i rd C lo c k S o ur c e : E XT E RN A L
C u r re n t C lo c k : T HI R D_ C LK
C l o ck S ta t us : N OR M AL
C lo c k H ol d - Ov e r : H ol d -o v er

[ S t at i c S SM me s s ag e ]
I n t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
L i n e C lo c k S SM M es s age : B
E x t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x t er n al Cl o ck T yp e : E 1 (7 5 ohm)

< < ES C k e y t o r e tu r n t o pr e vi o us menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

You can go to Alarm Queue Summary to check the Alarm report. There are two selections: all alarm and
current active alarm.
Controller Menu > Q -> Alarm Queue Summary

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Al arm Queue === 14:49:26 08/19/2015

> > Se l ec t ? *A L L _A l arm C u rr_Active

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = A la r m Q ueue Summary === 14:23:21 10/17/2012

1 C T RL : M A JR : SS M SW I T CH TO EX T ERNAL CLOCK -------------- 14:20:22 10/17/2012
2 C T RL : M A JR : SS M SW I T CH TO SL O T 1 P2 ------------------ 14:19:57 10/17/2012

< < SP A CE ba r t o re f res h or ES C k e y return to main menu >>

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = C ur r en t Active Alarm === 14:50:29 08/19/2015

1 S l ot 1 : Q u a d E 1#1 : MA J R: LO F ------------------------- 14:49:21 08/19/2015
2 S l ot 1 : Q u a d E 1#1 : MA J R: LO S --------------------- ---- 14:49:21 08/19/2015

< < SP A CE ba r t o re f res h or ES C k ey return to main menu >>

6.2.1.3. TSI Map

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (C) TSI Map

The TSI Map shows the map configuration status for all map, slots and ports.

CXR Page 50
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

The sample screen shows Map 1 Slot A Single E1 current map configuration status. It indicates Slot A
Timeslot (TS) 5 to 9 mapping to Slot 9 Port 1 Timeslot (TS) 5 to 9.

C XR QX 3 44 0 = == S ys t em Co nfiguration (Map) === 16:29:05 07/29/2011

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
M a p N um b er : MA P _ 1

S l o t N um b er : A E1 P O/ T S D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS

P o r t N um b er : N O N -C A S = == = = ========== ===== ==========
1 d 17 d
2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d
5 d 9 1 5 21 d
6 d 9 1 6 22 d
7 d 9 1 7 23 d
8 d 9 1 8 24 d
9 d 9 1 9 25 d
10 d 26 d
11 d 27 d
12 d 28 d
13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d
15 d 31 d
16 d

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o p re v io u s menu >>

Note: D displays either d/v/n. D for data, v for voice, and n for A/u transparent.

Another example shows Slot C with no plug-in card.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Sy s te m Configuration (Map) === 14:45:22 08/02/2011

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
M a p N um b er : MA P _ 1

S l o t N um b er : C P O/ T S D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS

P o r t N um b er : = == = = ========== ===== ==========

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o p re v io u s menu >>

6.2.1.4. Current TSI Map

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (D) Current TSI Map

The screen of Current TSI Map will show as below. The sample screen shows Slot A Single E1 current map
configuration status. It indicates Slot A Timeslot (TS) 5 to 9 mapping to Slot 9 Port 1 Timeslot (TS) 5 to 9.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Sys t e m C on f ig u ration (Current Map) ==16:19:54 10/01/2003

C u r re n t M ap

S l o t N um b er : 11 Q u ad - E 1 P O /T S D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS

P o r t N um b er : P3 NO N -CA S == = = ======== ===== ==========
3 1 d D 1 3 17 d D 17
3 2 d D 2 3 18 d D 18
3 3 d D 3 3 19 d D 19
3 4 d D 4 3 20 d D 20
3 5 d D 5 3 21 d D 21
3 6 d D 6 3 22 d D 22
3 7 d D 7 3 23 d D 23
3 8 d D 8 3 24 d D 24
3 9 d D 9 3 25 d D 25
3 10 d D 10 3 26 d D 26
3 11 d D 11 3 27 d D 27
3 12 d D 12 3 28 d D 28
3 13 d D 13 3 29 d D 29
3 14 d D 14 3 30 d D 30
3 15 d D 15 3 31 d D 31
3 16 d D 16

CXR Page 51
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o p re v io u s menu >>

Another example of Slot 9 Quad E1 current map configuration status. It indicates Slot 9 Quad E1 Port 1
Timeslot 5 to 9 mapping to Slot A Time Slot 5 to 9.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = Sy s t em Co n fi g uration (Current Map) ==16:16:02 07/29/2011

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
C u r re n t M ap

S l o t N um b er : 9 Q u ad- E 1 P O/ T S D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS

P o r t N um b er : P1 N O N-C A S = == = = ========== ===== ==========
1 d 17 d
2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d
1 5 d A 5 21 d
1 6 d A 6 22 d
1 7 d A 7 23 d
1 8 d A 8 24 d
1 9 d A 9 25 d
10 d 26 d
11 d 27 d
12 d 28 d
13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d
15 d 31 d
16 d

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o p re v io u s menu >>

Note: D displays either d/v/n. D for data, v for voice, and n for A/u transparent. See below screens for more
examples.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Sys t e m C on f ig u ration (C urrent Map) ==16:19:54 10/01/20 1 3

C u r re n t M ap

S l o t N um b er : 11 Q u ad - E 1 P O /T S D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS

P o r t N um b er : P3 NO N -CA S == = = ======== ===== ==========
3 1 v D 1 3 17 d D 17
3 2 v D 2 3 18 d D 18
3 3 v D 3 3 19 d D 19
3 4 v D 4 3 20 d D 20
3 5 v D 5 3 21 d D 21
3 6 v D 6 3 22 d D 22
3 7 v D 7 3 23 d D 23
3 8 v D 8 3 24 d D 24
3 9 v D 9 3 25 d D 25
3 10 v D 10 3 26 d D 26
3 11 v D 11 3 27 d D 27
3 12 v D 12 3 28 d D 28
3 13 v D 13 3 29 d D 29
3 14 v D 14 3 30 d D 30
3 15 v D 15 3 31 d D 31
3 16 v D 16

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o p re v io u s menu >>

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Sys t e m C on f ig u ration (Cu rrent Map) ==16:19:54 10/01/20 1 5

C u r re n t M ap

S l o t N um b er : 11 Q u ad - E 1 P O /T S D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS

P o r t N um b er : P3 NO N -CA S == = = ======== ===== ==========
3 1 n D 1 3 17 d D 17
3 2 n D 2 3 18 d D 18
3 3 n D 3 3 19 d D 19
3 4 n D 4 3 20 d D 20
3 5 n D 5 3 21 d D 21
3 6 n D 6 3 22 d D 22
3 7 n D 7 3 23 d D 23

CXR Page 52
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

3 8 n D 8 3 24 d D 24
3 9 n D 9 3 25 d D 25
3 10 n D 10 3 26 d D 26
3 11 n D 11 3 27 d D 27
3 12 n D 12 3 28 d D 28
3 13 n D 13 3 29 d D 29
3 14 n D 14 3 30 d D 30
3 15 n D 15 3 31 d D 31
3 16 n D 16

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o p re v io u s menu >>

6.2.1.5. Power/Fan Status

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (E) Power/Fan Status

This shows the current status of power1, power2, total power consumption, fan1 and fan2.

CXR QX3440 === Power/Fan Status === 17:28:09 08/03/2011

Power 1 Status : -48V 100W DC

Power 2 Status : N/A
Total (Maximum) power consumption (Estimation) : 26W

Fan 1 Status : Good

Fan 2 Status : Good

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

CXR QX3440 === Power/Fan Status === 17:28:09 08/03/2011

Power 1 Status : -48V 100W DC

Power 2 Status : N/A

Total (Maximum) power consumption (Estimation) : 26W

Fan 1 Status : Fail or not exist

Fan 2 Status : Fail or not exist

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

Note: Power consumption table shows below to estimate total power consumption and detect power plug-in
card status. Power consumption does not include –48V DC power supply consumption.

Table 6-1 Power consumption

Condition
Alarm Trap Warning message
Total Power DC Power
Consumption Supplies
>No FAN or FAN
Any External fan tray is necessary Please add a fan tray.
Failure

Single 100W Power supplies over loading Please remove plugged-in

Dual 100W Power protection not supported plug-in cards or upgrade to
>= 90W 150W power supplies.
100W + 150W Power protection not supported
Dual 150W Normal

CXR Page 53
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Single 150W Power supplies over loading

Please remove plugged-in
>= 135W 100W + 150W Power protection not supported cards or upgrade
Dual 150W Power protection not supported

6.2.1.6. Link backup function

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (G) Link backup function

This link backup function only apply to single E1/T1 (mini slot), single FOM (mini slot), and 1FOMA (single slot).

Below sample is to display the link backup function is on and the mode is non-revertible. The link backup
function of FE1 card (single E1) is Link-A and Link-B as backup link, and FOM card (mini slot) is Link-C and
Link-D as backup link.

NOTE:
Configuration for link backup will not be changed if the user turns on the backup function without selecting the
backup link type, or turns off the backup function without clearing the backup link type.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S y s te m C o nf i guration (Backup) === 17:30:31 08/03/2011

B a c ku p f u nc t io n : ON
Mode : no n - re v er t ib l e

Link : L i nk - A L i nk - B Li n k- C Link- D Link - 1 Link -2 Link -3 Link - 4

M o d el : FE1 FE1 FO M FOM QuadE1 QuadE1
= = = == = == = == = = == = === = = == = == = == = ===========================================
B a c ku p L i nk : L i nk - B - - -- - - Li n k- D ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
B a c ku p F u n : ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
L i n k S ta t us : W o rk I d le Wo r k Idle Normal Normal Normal Normal

Link : L i nk - 5 L i nk - 6 Li n k- 7 Link- 8 Link - 9 Link10 Link11 Link12

M o d el : QuadE1 QuadE1
= = = == = == = == = = == = === = = == = == = == = ===========================================
B a c ku p L i nk : - - -- - - - - -- - - -- - --- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
B a c ku p F u n : OFF OFF OF F OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
L i n k S ta t us : N o rm a l N o rm a l No r mal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

6.2.1.7. QDS1 1:1 protection

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (G) Link backup function

This function displays the current QDS1 1:1 protection status. Below sample shows the port 1 and port 2 of slot
9: 10 as circuit protection.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 === QDS1 1:1 Protection === 18:28:09 07/29/2011

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Protect Pair(Master:Backup) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
=========================== =========== =========== =========== ===========
Slot A :B ( FE1: ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot C :D ( :FE1 ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 1 :2 ( FOM:FOM ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 3 :4 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 5 :6 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 7 :8 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 9 :10 (QuadE1:QuadE1) CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DISABLE DISABLE
Slot 11:12 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------

Protection Working Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

Slot A :B ( FE1: )
Slot C :D ( :FE1 )
Slot 1 :2 ( FOM:FOM )
Slot 3 :4 ( : )
Slot 5 :6 ( : )
Slot 7 :8 ( : )
Slot 9 :10 (QuadE1:QuadE1) 9 -1 10-2

CXR Page 54
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Slot 11:12 ( : )

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Note: The highlight on 9-1 means slot 9 port 1 as protection working port.

6.2.1.8. DS0-SNCP Status

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (K) DS0-SNCP Status

This function is to view the current status of DS0-SNCP circuit level protection.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Status === 13:40:31 04/29/2011

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE Total DS0-SNCP: 1

Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode

Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================
1 6 1 01 W10 1 01 11 1 01 D Non-revertible

Note: d/v means data or voice mode

6.2.1.9. Inband Protection Status

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (M)> Inband Protection Status

This function is to view the current status of Inband Protection Status.

CXR QX3440 === Inband Protection Status === 17:52:27 05/10/2013

Protection: ENABLE
Using Map : MAP_1

Primary Slot: 1 WORKING

Port: P1
T.S.: 1

Secondary Slot: 2 BACKUP

Port: P1
T.S.: 1

Switch Mode: Non-revertible

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

6.2.1.10. Activation Status

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (S)> Activation Status

This function is to view slot activation status.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Ac t ivation Status === 17:02:57 04/17/2014

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e options by TAB, or by typing

CXR Page 55
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

S l o t: CT R L

< < ES C k e y i gn o r e a nd r e tu r n, ENTER key accept change >>

An example shows status of Slot CTRL for warranty due date, PDH-Ring and iXC3440 status.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Ac t ivation Status === 17:03:37 04/17/2014

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e options by TAB, or by typing

S l o t: CT R L

Item P r ima r y Redundant

= = = == = == = = = = === = = == = = ===========
W a r ra n ty 2 0 15 - 0 2 -2 4 2015 - 02 - 24
P D H -R i ng A c tiv a t ed Activated
i X C 34 4 0 A c tiv a t ed Activated

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to previous menu >>

Another example shows status of Slot 8 for warranty due date, terminal server and omnibus status.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Ac t ivation Status === 14:07:27 04/22/2014

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e options by TAB, or by typing

S l o t: 8

M o d el : 8 UD T E

Item S t atu s
= = = == = == = = = = === = = == = =
W a r ra n ty 2 0 15 - 0 4 -2 1
T e r mi n al S er v er A c tiv a t ed
O m n ib u s A c tiv a t ed

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to previous menu >>

6.2.2 Clock Source Configuration

Controller Menu > (B) Clock source Configuration

This function shows the current clock source configuration info. Normal mode and SSM mode sample screens
show as below.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == Clo c k S o ur c e S tatus (Normal Mode) === 18:19:18 08/03/2011

CXR Page 56
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

M a s te r _C l k S ou r c e : IN T E RN A L Clock Hold -Over: OFF

S e c on d _C l k S ou r c e : IN T E RN A L Hold -Over State: Normal
C u r re n t C lo c k : MA S T ER _ CL K Frame Pulse Period : 8001.2 Hz
C l k _R e co v er _ Mo d e : MA N U AL
C l o ck St a tu s : NO R M AL
E x t . C lo c k T yp e : E1 ( 7 5o h m)
D u a l E xt e rn a l C l oc k Pr o t ec t io n : Disable

< < ES C k e y t o r e tu r n t o pr e vi o us menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = C l o ck So u rc e Status (SSM Mode) === 10:00:17 08/18/2014

F ir s t C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _1 P1 [ Tx_Sabit: F , Rx_Sabit: 2 ]
S e co n d C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _2 P1 Static SSM
T hi r d C lo c k S o ur c e : N ON E
C u rr e nt C lo c k : F IR S T_ C LK
C lo c k S t at u s : N OR M AL
SS M S e nd ( he x ) : 2

[ S t at i c S SM me s s ag e ]
I n t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
L i ne Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x te r na l Cl o ck T y pe : E 1 (7 5 ohm)

C lo c k H ol d - Ov e r : O FF
H ol d -O v er S ta t e : N or m al
F ra m e P ul s e P e ri o d : 8 00 1 .2 Hz

< < ES C k e y t o r e tu r n t o pr e vi o us menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

6.2.3 Alarm Queue Summary

Controller Menu > (Q) Alarm Queue Summary

This function is to view the Alarm Queue Summary. There are two selections: all alarm and current active
alarm.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Al arm Queue === 14:49:26 08/19/2015

> > Se l ec t ? *A L L _A l arm C u rr _ Ac tive

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = A la r m Q ueue Summary === 18:21:00 08/03/2011

1 - - C o nt r ol l e r: SLO T 9 ST A RT U P --------- 19:03:10 03/01/2001
2 - - C o nt r ol l e r: PRI M A RY ST A RT - UP -------- 19:03:07 03/01/2001

< < SP A CE ba r t o re f res h or ES C k e y return to main menu >>

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = C ur r en t Active Alarm === 14:50:29 08/19/2015

1 S l ot 1 : Q u a d E 1#1 : MA J R: LO F ------------------- ------ 14:49:21 08/19/2015
2 S l ot 1 : Q u a d E 1#1 : MA J R: LO S ------------------------- 14:49:21 08/19/2015

< < SP A CE ba r t o re f res h or ES C k ey return to main menu >>

When the RTB and RTA cards register in system excess 8 cards, the system will issue an alarm. The message
shows below.

CXR Page 57
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

1 CTRL: MAJR: TOO MANY RTA or RTB CARD------------------ 11:13:06 12/26/2012

6.2.4 Information Summary

Controller Menu > (I) Information Summary

This function displays the current information of all plug-in cards.

The “unplugged” means the registered card has been unplugged. To clear the “unplugged” wording from the
screen, go to Controller Menu > (S) System > (J) Clear Empty Slot and select the slot you want to clear.

The “mismatch” means the slot has replaced by another type of card which is different from registered card
type. When the word of mismatch show up, press “S” command from the controller menu, then enter “I”
command in the screen of "Controller Setup" in order to init a new plug-in card.

CXR QX3440 === Information Summary === 18:22:53 08/03/2011

Slot Card/Interface Serial Software Version Registered Card

==== ================ ====== =================== ===============
A FE1 120ohm N/A V4.02.05 12/17/2010 FE1
B FE1 unplugged
C
D FE1 120ohm N/A V3.05.01 09/21/2007 FE1

==== ================ ====== =================== ===============

1 FOM N/A FOM
2 Quad E1 V3.01.01 06/17/2011 FOM mismatch
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 Quad E1 010595 V3.01.01 06/17/2011 Quad E1
10 Quad E1 unplugged
11
12

<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

The “redundancy” means the 9th RTA or RTB card wants to initialize but the system only allow up to 8 cards of
RTA and RTB. It will show this comment.

CXR QX3440 === Information Summary === 11:13:53 12/26/2012

Slot Card/Interface Serial Software Version Reg. Card Comment

==== ================ ====== =================== ========= =========
A Router-A 292711 V2.07.02 Router-A
B
C Router-A 292712 V2.07.02 Router-A
D Router-A 292470 V2.07.02 Router-A

==== ================ ====== =================== ========= =========

1 OCT-RT-B 990728 V1.08.02 OCT-RT-B
2 OCT-RT-B 990739 V1.08.02 OCT-RT-B
3 OCT-RT-B OCT-RT-B redundancy
4 OCT-RT-B 002315 V1.07.02 OCT-RT-B
5
6
7 TDMoE unplugged
8
9 Dry Contact N/A Dry Contact
10
11 OCT-RT-B 030002 V1.08.02 OCT-RT-B
12 OCT-RT-B 001301 V1.08.02 OCT-RT-B
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

CXR Page 58
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

6.2.5 Redundant CTRL Information

Controller Menu > (R) Redundant CTRL Information

This function displays the redundant CTRL info: the serial number, hardware and software version of the
redundant controller card.

CXR QX3440 === Redundant Board Information === 09:47:31 10/09/2009

Serial Number : 123542

Hardware Version: Ver.J
Software Version: V8.05.01 09/29/2009

The Redundant Controller shows Disabled in controller menu:

· When the Hardware, Software, or Brand version of the Redundant CTRL card is different from Primary,
the Redundant Controller will show Disabled in controller menu.
· When there is no redundant CTRL card.

If there is no redundant CTRL card, press “R” will show Redundant Board does not exist!

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = C o nt r ol ler Menu === 09:11:02 08/01/2012

S e r ia l N u mb e r : 1 705 0 7 Redundant Controller: Disabled

H a r dw a re Ve r si o n : V er. H Start Time : 15:10:48 07/31/2012
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n : V 8.2 4 . 01 07 / 31 / 20 12 Device Name: CXR QX3440

[ D I SP L AY ] [SETUP]
C - > S ys t em Co n f ig u rat i o n S - > System Setup
B - > C lo c k s ou r c e C onf i g ur a ti o n M - > System Alarm Setup
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e S u mma r y W - > Firmware Transfer
I - > I nf o rm a ti o n S u mma r y V - > Store/Retrieve Configuration
R - > R ed u nd a nt C TR L In f o rm a ti o n K - > Clock source Setup
P - > P er f or m an c e R e por t T - > Bit Error Rate Test

[ L O G] [MISC]
F - > L og Of f A - > Alarm Cut Off
O - > L og On X - > Clear Alarm Queue
U - > C ho o se a S l ot Y - > Controller Return to Default
Z - > Controller Reset
Redundant Board does not exist!

6.2.6 Performance Report

Press “P” from the Controller Menu, then press “A” to access the performance report of DS0-SNCP circuit level
protection.

CXR QX3440 === Performance Report === 18:24:52 08/03/2011

A -> DS0-SNCP Performance

<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>

DS0-SNCP circuit level protection report is the 7-days performance data of the settled DS0-SNCP circuit level
protection group. The sample screen below shows the system now has five working DS0-SNCP groups. You
can see the timeslot, elapsed seconds of the protected slot and port.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Performance Report === 18:04:15 10/08/2009

Idx Protected AS
S P TS Elapsed [Today][10/07][10/06][10/05][10/04][10/03][10/02][10/01]
1 A 0 01 165 82 . . . . . . .
2 A 0 02 165 82 . . . . . . .
3 A 0 03 165 82 . . . . . . .
4 A 0 04 165 82 . . . . . . .
5 A 0 05 165 82 . . . . . . .

CXR Page 59
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Before you get access to “DS0-SNCP Performance Report”, make sure you have already set up at least one
DS0-SNCP circuit level protection group with 3E1 plug-in cards. To set up DS0-SNCP circuit level protection,
choose the DS0-SNCP setup function on the VT100 menu(command path: Main Menu> (S)System Setup>
(K)DS0-SNCP Setup), set DS0-SNCP to “ENABLE”, and set Action to “Create”. Then, press ENTER.
CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Setup === 09:49:51 10/09/2009
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE
Using Map: MAP_1
Action : Create

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Select two 3E1 cards for DS0-SNCP circuit level protection and a particular plug-in card as the protected unit
and confirm with the setting.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Creation === 09:49:12 10/09/2009

Please Input decimal number (1~31), BACKSPACE to edit

Protection Group Creation, Using map 1 Total DS0-SNCP: 5

==============================================================================
Protected Slot: A ( E1 ) [.PPPPP..........................]
Port: NON-CAS
T.S.:01
Count:05

Primary Slot: 1 ( 3E1 ) [.WWWWW..........................]

Port:P1 NON-CAS Protection Delay: 00
T.S.:01 Upstream Send AIS: On

Secondary Slot: 2 ( 3E1 ) [.SSSSS..........................]

Port:P1 NON-CAS Protection Delay: 00
T.S.:01 Upstream Send AIS: On

Switch Mode :Non-revertible

Confirm :Yes

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

6.2.7 System Setup

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup

For details, see the following sections.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = C o nt r oller Setup === 10:37:14 03/08/2013

[S Y ST E M] [MAP]
A - > S ys t e m C - > TSI Map Setup
S - > S NM P Se t up D - > Select a New TSI Map
B - > P as s w or d E - > Copy a TSI Map to A nother
H - > T EL N E T/ S SH S e tu p F - > Clear a TSI Map
I - > U ni t In i t/C l e ar J - > Signaling Convert Table

[P R OT E CT I O N] [OTHER]
G - > L in k Ba c kup F un c ti o n L - > Command Line
Q - > Q DS 1 1: 1 Pr o t ec t io n N - > SNTP Setup
K - > D S0 - S NC P Se t u p U - > SYSLOG Setup
R - > P DH R in g Pr o t ec t io n P - > Power Setup

CXR Page 60
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

T - > P DH R in g Di a g no s ti c V - > RADIUS Setup

M - > I nb a n d P rot e c ti o n

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n Menu or enter a command >>

6.2.7.1. System

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (A) System

This menu is allowed to set up configuration for system, console port, and TSI map. Network system setup is
used to do different interface (LAN, WAN) IP setup. You can enable LAN or WAN or both for point to point
communication.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S y st e m S etup (SYSTEM) === 10:43:16 03/08/2013

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; P l ea s e I nput: hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy, BACKSPAC E to edit
[ S y st e m]
T i m e/ D at e : 1 0: 4 3:1 6 03 / 08 / 20 1 3
D e v ic e N a me : C XR QX3 4 4 0
[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: B RI D GE
NI E N IP A dd r e ss S u bn e tM a sk Frame LB Timer
L A N : O N 19 2 .1 6 8 .0 1 1.0 5 3 2 5 5. 2 55 . 255.000 Ethernet
WAN :ON HDLC 00000001
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: N A G a te w ay IPAddr: 192.168.011.254
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D
[ C O NS O LE po r t]
B a u d R at e : 3 84 0 0
D a t a L en g th : 8 -B i ts
S t o p B it : 1 -B i t
P a r it y : N ON E
X O N _X O FF : X OF F

[ T S I m ap ] [Clock]
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : 1(B i d ir e ct i on ) Clock Mode : Normal
I d l e S ig n al l in g : 1 0 10

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

Note: NI = Network Interface, EN = Enable (DIS=Disable), LB Timer = Loopback Timer

The setup procedure is as follows:

If you would like to manage your QX3440 units through inband management, go to “System Setup (MAP)” to
activate TSI map setup first. The command path is: Main Menu> (S) Controller Setup > (C) TSI Map Setup.
Choose “IB” (inband) for target slot, and then select the card type and port you would like to use. Then choose
Yes to confirm your new settings.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Sy s te m Setup (MAP) === 15:38:08 12/03/2008

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
M A P N O : M AP _ 1
Ta r g et I n - B an d Source Quad -E1 NON -C A S
T a r ge t PO / T S D SL / P O T S P O/ T S D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
S l o t : I B == = = = = === = = == = = = == = = ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : 1 d 1 1 1 1 1 d IB 1 17 d
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d
T . S .# : 0 1 5 d 21 d
C l e ar : N o 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d
S o u rc e 10 d 26 d
Slot : 1 11 d 27 d
Port : P1 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d
C o n fi r m? Y es 15 d 31 d
16 d

CXR Page 61
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o C on t ro l ler Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

Go back to system setup. First, enable your network by choosing “ON” for EN option. Then, key in the IP
address and subnet mask of the unit you wish to communicate with. You can also choose HDLC or PPP for
the frame. Press ESC to save your new setting. Once you complete the procedures above, the QX3440 units
will start activating WAN network communication.

Note 1: To manage your AM3400 units through LAN, enable the LAN network and key in the IP address of the
unit you would like to manage. It is a simple way to manage a specific QX3440 unit.

Note 2: To setup inband management, one 64K timeslot must be assigned for link to the controller (CTRL)
through the internal cross-connect (XC). This timeslot must be either Slot D/Port4 or Slot 12/Port4.
Below are the plug-in card types that will be influenced by the timeslot limitation in either Slot D or Slot 12:

Slot Plug-in Card

Slot D FOM, MQE1, RTA
Slot 12 RTB, 4GH, TDMoE, QE1/QT1

Although the framing option for each of the 4 ports of a Quad E1/T1 interface card or a FOM interface can be
configured either "unframed" or "framed", provision for inband management imposes limitation as follows:
when one of these is selected for inband management, the Port 4 in that Slot, D or 12, must be configured to
framed. For further information of inband management, please refer to Chapter 8, Appendix B: Inband
Management.

The RTA, RTB, 4GH and TDMoE card supports up to 32 timeslots in normal condition. Due to the timeslot
limitation, a 64K timeslot is reserved in the port 4 of Slot D and Slot 12. Therefore, users can only set up to 31
timeslots for these cards when they are plugged in either Slot D or Slot 12.

Note 3: The LB Timer (Loopback Timer) is used to deactivate the loopback action on the interface which has
cross connection to the inband channel (WAN). For example, if the inband mapped to an E1 interface, then
doing a loopback action on the E1 interface will cause inband management down. Thus when a loopback
action was detected on an interface which has inband mapping, the QX3440 system will deactivate the
loopback action automatically once the LB Timer expired to prevent loss of inband management.

Then, go back to Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (A) System to select the Inband Uses Slot.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S y st e m S etup (SYSTEM) === 10:43:16 03/08/2013

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; P l ea s e I nput: hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy, BACKSPACE to edit
[ S y st e m]
T i m e/ D at e : 1 0: 4 3:1 6 03 / 08 / 20 1 3
D e v ic e N a me : C XR QX3 4 4 0
[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: R OU T ER
NI E N IP A dd r e ss S u bn e tM a sk Frame LB Timer
L A N : O N 19 2 .1 6 8 .0 1 1.0 5 3 2 5 5. 2 55 . 255.000 Ethernet
WAN :ON HDLC 00000001
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: N A G a te w ay IPAddr: 192.168.011.254
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D
[ C O NS O LE po r t]
B a u d R at e : 3 84 0 0
D a t a L en g th : 8 -B i ts
S t o p B it : 1 -B i t
P a r it y : N ON E
X O N _X O FF : X OF F

[ T S I m ap ] [Clock]
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : 1(B i d ir e ct i on ) Clock Mode : Normal
I d l e S ig n al l in g : 1 0 10

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

The system application for WAN and LAN communication is as below:

CXR Page 62
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

QX3440 QX3440
CTRL CTRL (1)
LAN
E1/ (3) E1/
(2) FOM (2) `
FOM

WAN WAN
PC

Note: IB= Inband

(1) Use VT100 terminal to enable LAN network (Ethernet Port). This way you can manage a specific AM3400
unit. If you would like to make a series of AM3400 units to communicate though WAN network, proceed to
step (2).

(2) Once you start managing an QX3440 unit, go to “System Setup (MAP)” in VT100 and set up inband
management. Also choose a desired plug-in card (E1 or FOM) for WAN network communication. Then,
enable the WAN network and key in the IP address in “System Setup”. Follow the same procedure to set
up the units you wish to manage though WAN network.

(3) QX3440 units will start communicating through E1 or FOM card under WAN network.

6.2.7.2. SNMP

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup

The SNMP setup has 6 sub-menus.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = S N MP Setup === 10:54:58 12/08/2006

A -> S N MP Sy s tem Setup

B -> V 1 : T ra p Setup
C -> V 3 : U se r -Based Security Model Setup
D -> V 3 : V ie w -Based Acc ess Control Model Setup 1
E -> V 3 : V ie w -Based Access Control Model Setup 2
F -> V 3 : T ar g et & Notify Setup

< < ES C k e y t o r e tu r n t o pr e vi o us menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

SNMP System Setup

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup > (A) SNMP System Setup

The user must select SNMP model for V1 only, V3 only or V1+V3 from the screen. The user can reset the
device name, system location, and system contact info.
C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S ys t em Setup (SNMP) === 18:29:51 08/03/2011
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , B A CK S PA C E to edit, ESC to abort

D e v ic e N a me : CX R QX 3 4 40 _ __ _ __ _
S y s te m L o ca t io n : RU E DE L ’O R NE T TE
28 4 10 A B ON D AN T
FR A NCE

CXR Page 63
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

S y s te m C o nt a ct : Na m e: F A E T e l: + 33 237 628 800 Fax:+ 33 237 628 801

E- m ail : s up p or t @c x r.com

S N M P M od e l : V 1 on l y

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

V1: Trap Setup

Press B from the main menu to set up Trap and Community. The user can set a maximum of five traps IP for
SNMPv1. The trap IP is the server’s IP for NMS management. Once an alarm occurs in the QX3440
controller, the alarm will be sent to the target trap IP address trough LAN or WAN, depending on the trap
system IP you choose.

To set up the Trap IP, follow the procedures below:

Trap IP 1 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public

Trap IP 2 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public
Trap IP 3 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public
Trap IP 4 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public
(1)
Trap IP 5 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public

(2) Trap system IP : WAN

(3) Alarm/Trap Type: Vendor-Spec
(4) TrapObject Type: Vendor-Spec

(1) Key in the trap IP address and its community name. The default setting for community name is “public”.

(2) The trap system IP is the trap’s source IP address. Select “LAN” or “WAN’ for trap system IP, and the
selection will determine the direction that sends the alarm trap. Note that the selection should be the same with
the network interface (NI) that shows “ON” on the System Setup (System) screen. If LAN is “ON” and WAN is
“OFF”, choose “LAN” for system trap IP. If WAN is “ON” and LAN is “OFF”, choose “WAN” for trap IP. On the
sample screen below, both LAN and WAN are turned on. In this case, select either LAN or WAN for trap
system IP according to your need.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (SYSTEM) === 18:30:22 08/03/2011

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy, BACKSPACE to edit
[System]
Time/Date : 18:30:23 08/03/2011
Device Name : CXR QX3440

[Network]
NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer
LAN :ON 010.003.023.010 255.255.000.000 Ethernet
WAN :ON 020.001.001.002 255.255.000.000 HDLC 00000001
Gateway Interface: LAN Gateway IPAddr: 000.000.000.000
Inband Uses Slot: 12 Note: Slot 12 port 4 can't use unframe mode!

(3) Select the Alarm/Trap Type to decide the format of alarm type displayed in SNMP menu. The alarm type
tables for “Vendor Spec” and “Assigned” are listed in Appendix D: cc Alarm Type.

(4) Select the TrapObject Type to decide the format of trap object type displayed in SNMP menu. The options
are “Vendor-Spec” as default or “Individual”

CXR Page 64
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Example of Local Trap in SNMP menu:

Blue words show the different between Vendor-Spec and Individual.

Vendor-Spec:
localTrap
[1] ccAlarmQueueString.1 (DisplayString): LOCAL ALARM: Slot 1 : Quad E1#1: LOS-------------
------------------ 15:32:00 05/08/2011
[2] ccAlarmType.1 (Integer): 22
[3] ccAlarmModel.1 (Integer): quad-e1
[4] ccAlarmSlot.1 (Integer): slot-1
[5] ccAlarmPort.1 (Integer): port-1
[6] ccAlarmSeverity.1 (Integer): major
[7] ccAlarmLink.1 (Integer): none
[8] snmpTrapEnterprise.0 (Object ID): CXR-QX3440

Individual:
localTrap
[1] ccAlarmQueueString.22 (DisplayString): Slot 1 #1: LOS
[2] ccAlarmType.22 (Integer): 22
[3] ccAlarmModel.22 (Integer): quad-e1
[4] ccAlarmSlot.22 (Integer): slot-1
[5] ccAlarmPort.22 (Integer): port-1
[6] ccAlarmSeverity.22 (Integer): major
[7] ccAlarmLink.22 (Integer): none
[8] snmpTrapEnterprise.0 (Object ID): CXR-QX3440

(5) Go to System Setup (command path: Main Menu> (S) Controller Setup> (A) System), set up the network
interface type (LAN and WAN) and key in the IP address.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (SYSTEM) === 18:30:22 08/03/2011

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
[System]
Time/Date : 18:30:23 08/03/2011
Device Name : CXR QX3440

[Network]
NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer
(5) LAN :ON 010.003.023.010 255.255.000.000 Ethernet
WAN :ON 020.001.001.002 255.255.000.000 HDLC 00000001
Gateway Interface: LAN Gateway IPAddr: 000.000.000.000
Inband Uses Slot: 12 Note: Slot 12 port 4 can't use unframe mode!mode!
[CONSOLE port]
Baud Rate : 38400
Data Length : 8-Bits
Stop Bit : 1-Bit
Parity : NONE
XON_XOFF : XOFF

[TSI map] [Clock]

TSI Function : 1:1(Bidirection) Clock Mode : Normal
Idle Signalling: 1010

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Note: NI = Network Interface, EN = Enable (DIS=Disable), LB Timer = Loopback Timer

CXR Page 65
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

The system will automatically assign the trap IP to LAN IP or WAN IP according to the “trap system IP” and
“Network interface” you set up.

Below is the table of trap source IP condition under different LAN and WAN settings.

Option Setting Trap Source IP

LAN EN WAN EN
LAN Off Off No trap
Off With IP On LAN IP
Without IP WAN IP
(0.0.0.0)
On Off LAN IP
On On LAN IP
WAN Off Off No Trap
Off On WAN IP
On Off With IP WAN IP
Without IP LAN IP
(0.0.0.0)
On On WAN IP
Option= “Trap System IP” option on VT: Trap IP (Trap and Community) screen
Setting= “NI” (Network Interface) option on System Setup screen.

V3: User-Based Security Model Setup

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup > (C) V3: User-Based Security Model Setup

For SNMPv3, user must setup USM and VACM. For USM, it is used to setup user authentication and privacy.
Press C to setup V3: User-Based Security Model. There are 12 digit numbers for Engine ID. The user’s name
is “cxrmd5” and ‘cxrsha”, the password is “cxr1234”.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = S N MP Setup (USM) === 11:02:32 12/08/2006

[ M y E n gi n e] . . .
E n g in e I D : 00 0 0 03 3 700 0 0 00 0 07 F 00 0 001
B o o ts : 8
T o t al Us e r: 6

[ U s er 01 ] . . .
E n g in e I D : 0 00 0 033 7 0 00 0 00 0 07 F 000001
U s e r N am e : c xr m d5
A u t h P ro t oc o l: M D5
A u t h K ey : C D3 6 44D 2 1 8E B 24 7 E3 6 97434F7F2B3E15
P r i v P ro t oc o l: D ES
P r i v K ey : C D3 6 44D 2 1 8E B 24 7 E3 6 97434F 7F2B3E15
S t a tu s : A ct i ve
S t o ra g e : N on V ola t i le

< < ES C => r et u rn t o p rev i o us me n u, LEFT/RIGHT=>prev/next user, F=>find user >>

< < E= > ed i t e ng i n e, ENT E R => e di t u s er, C=>clone user, A=>add user, D=>delete >>

If you press Enter, an edit screen will appear. The user must enter a password. A delay will occur because of
transfer time to record the key.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = S N MP Setup (USM) === 11:14:50 12/08/2006

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , B A CK S PA C E to edit, ESC to abort

[ M y E n gi n e] . . .
E n g in e I D : 00 0 0 03 3 700 0 0 00 0 07 F 00 0 001
B o o ts : 8
T o t al Us e r: 6

[ U s er 01 ] . . .

CXR Page 66
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

E n g in e I D : 0 00 0 033 7 0 00 0 00 0 07 F 000001
U s e r N am e : c xr m d5
A u t h P ro t oc o l: M D5
A u t h P as s wo r d: c xr 5 678 _ _ __ _ __ _ __ _ ____________ _
P r i v P ro t oc o l: D ES
P r i v P as s wo r d:
S t a tu s : A ct i ve
S t o ra g e : N on V ola t i le

[ S k ip pa s sw o rd w il l no t ch a ng e c u rrent key.]
< < ES C k e y i gn o r e a nd r e tu r n, EN T ER key accept change >>

V3: View-Based Access Control Model Setup 1

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup > (D) V3: View-Based Access Control Model Setup 1

Press “D” to setup context and group, the user should be in a group. The default group name is “initial” and
security name is name of user.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == SN M P S etup (VACM) === 11:09:22 12/08/2006

[ C o nt e xt ] : (e m p ty )

[ S e cu r it y t o G r o up ] 1/ 7
S e c ur i ty Mo d el : V3 ( USM )
S e c ur i ty Na m e : cx r md5
G r o up Na m e : in i tia l
S t a tu s : Ac t ive
S t o ra g e : No n Vol a t il e

< < ES C => r et u rn t o m enu , UP / DO W N= > context/group, LEFT/RIGHT=>prev/next >>

< < F= > fi n d, EN T E R= > edi t , A = >a d d, D=>delete >>

V3: View-Based Access Control Model Setup 2

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup > (E) V3: View-Based Access Control Model Setup 2

Press “E” to edit Access and View for VACM, every group can define their own security level and have read
and write access to view. “Item shows (reserved)” means that the item shown is not currently supported by this
version. View contains 1 or more MIB sub-trees. The V3 driver will check incoming packages.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == SN M P S etup (VACM) === 11:18:28 12/08/2006

[ A c ce s s] 1/ 3
G r o up Na m e : c xr 1
S e c ur i ty Mo d el : V 3(U S M )
S e c ur i ty Le v el : A uth P r iv
C o n te x t P re f ix : ( res e r ve d )
C o n te x t M at c h : ( res e r ve d )
R e a d V ie w N a me : c xr
W r i te Vi e w N am e : c xr
N o t if y V i ew Na m e : ( res e r ve d )
S t a tu s : A cti v e
S t o ra g e : N onV o l at i le

[ V i ew Fa m il y ] 1 / 5
V i e w N am e : on e
S u b -t r ee : 1. 3 . 6. 1 .6. 3
Mask : (r e s er v ed)
Type : in c l ud e
S t a tu s : Ac t i ve
S t o ra g e : No n V ol a til e

< < ES C => r et u rn t o p rev i o us me n u, UP/DOWN=>Access/View, LEFT/RIGHT=>prev/next >>

< < EN T ER = >e d it , A= > add , D= > de l et e >>

CXR Page 67
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

V3: Target & Notify Setup

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup > (F) V3: Target & Notify Setup

“F” command is to notify the V3 target (similar to situation with V1 trap).

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == S N MP Se t up (Target & Notify) === 11:24:06 12/08/2006

[ T a rg e t] 1/ 2
T a r ge t N a me : t a r ge t 2
D o m ai n : UDP
I P Ad d re s s : 1 0 . 2. 1 .1 No t ify Port: 162
Tag : g r o up 2
T i m eo u t : 3 Re t ry : 0
P a r am e te r : g r o up 2
S t a tu s : A c t iv e
[ P a ra m et e r] 1/ 2
P a r am Na m e : g r o up 2
M P Mo d el : V1
S e c M o de l : V 1
S e c L e ve l : N o A ut h NoP r i v
S e c N a me : p u b li c
S t a tu s : A c t iv e
[ N o ti f y] 1/ 2
Name : g r o up 1
Tag : g r o up 1
Type : Trap
S t a tu s : A c t iv e
< < ES C => r et u rn t o m enu , UP / DO W N= > Target/Parameter/Notify, LEFT/RIGHT=>prev/next
< < EN T ER = >e d it , A= > add , D= > de l et e >>

6.2.7.3. Password

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (B) Password

Only ADMIN privilege can do ADMIN/OPERATOR password setup.

Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press “B” to enable or change password.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = P as s word Setup === 17:21:21 09/17/201 2

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e o ptions by TAB, or by typing

S e l ec t : *O P ER A T OR A D M IN

E n ab l e P a ss w ord : Y E S
C h an g e P a ss w ord : N O

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

Field Option Default Notes

Selection ADMIN, OPERATOR ADMIN Only ADMIN privilege can do password
setup
Enable Password YES, NO NO Enable/disable the password function
Change Password YES, NO NO

6.2.7.4. TELNET/SSH Setup

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (H) TELNET/SSH Setup

SSH (Secure Shell) is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged over a secure channel between two
computers. Encryption provides confidentiality and integrity of data. SSH uses public-key cryptography to

CXR Page 68
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

authenticate the remote computer and allow the remote computer to authenticate the user, if necessary.
TELNET (TELecommunication NETwork) is a network protocol used on the Internet or local area network (LAN)
connections.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = T E LN E T/SSH Setup === 11:42:03 03/07/2008

A R R OW KE Y S : C U R SO R MO V E , EN T ER KEY : ITEM SELECT

SSH S e rv e r : OF F

T E L NE T S e rv e r : OF F

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

Notes:
Field Option Default
SSH Server ON, OFF
TELNET Server ON, OFF OFF

6.2.7.5. Init Init/Clear

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (I) Unit Init/Clear

This function is to initiate or clear a plug-in card.

CXR QX3440 === Unit Init/Clear === 04:46:21 09/26/2012

ARROW KEYS: Cursor move; Change options by TAB, or by typing
SLOT REG. Model Card Model State
==== =============== =============== =============
A MQuad E1 MQuad E1
B FE1 FE1
C FT1 FT1
D FOM FOM
1 Quad E1 Quad E1
2 Quad E1 Quad E1
3 3E1 3E1
4 3E1 3E1
5 G703 Quad T1 card mismatch
6 X.21-A DTE-A
7
8 FOM FOM
9 X.50 X.50
10
11 GSHDSL-4 GSHDSL-4
12 Quad T1 unplugged
Command : Init
Unit : 5
Init and Register......Success!
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Field Option Default Notes

Command Init, Clear Init Init: Initialize the card
Clear: De-register the card
Unit A to D, 1 to 12

After the initialization procedure is complete, go to Controller Menu > (I) Information Summary to check the
result.

Note: The allowance for RTB and RTA cards in QX3440 are totally up to 8 cards. If RTB and RTA cards
exceed 8, the system will not allow the 9th plug-in card (RTA or RTB) to initialize. The state will show
“redundancy”. The system will also issue an alarm message “TOO MANY RTA or RTB CARD”. You can go to
Controller Menu > (Q) Alarm Queue Summary.

CXR Page 69
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

CXR QX3440 === Unit Init/Clear === 11:15:11 12/26/2012

ARROW KEYS: Cursor move; Change options by TAB, or by typing
SLOT REG. Model Card Model State
==== =============== =============== =============
A Router-A Router-A
B
C Router-A Router-A
D Router-A Router-A
1 OCT-RT-B OCT-RT-B
2 OCT-RT-B OCT-RT-B
3 OCT-RT-B OCT-RT-B redundancy
4 OCT-RT-B OCT-RT-B
5
6
7 TDMoE unplugged
8
9 Dry Contact Dry Contact
10
11 OCT-RT-B OCT-RT-B
12 OCT-RT-B OCT-RT-B
Command : Init

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

6.2.7.6. TSI Map Setup

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (C) TSI Map Setup

Access the TSI Map setup, it allows up to set up to four maps setting, but only one can active. After choose the
map number, select the desired slot and port number for the mapping target. Next, select the starting timeslot
number (T.S) and the timeslot amount (T.S #), and data or voice mode (d/v) for the target. Also select the
desired slot, port and starting timeslot number (T.S) for the mapping source. After setup, select “Yes” for
confirmation.

C X R QX 3 44 0 == = System Setup (MAP) === 18:04:10 08/01/2011

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
M A P N O : M AP _ 1
Ta r g et E1 N O N - CAS Source Quad -E1 NON -C A S
T a r ge t PO / T S D SL / P O T S P O/ T S D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
S l o t : A == = = = = === = = == = = = == = = ========= = ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : 1 d 9 1 1 1 7 d 9 1 17 1 1 d A 1 1 17 d A 17
T.S. : 01 2 d 9 1 2 1 8 d 9 1 18 1 2 d A 2 1 18 d A 18
3 d 9 1 3 1 9 d 9 1 19 1 3 d A 3 1 19 d A 19
4 d 9 1 4 2 0 d 9 1 20 1 4 d A 4 1 20 d A 20
T . S .# : 3 1 5 d 9 1 5 2 1 d 9 1 21 1 5 d A 5 1 21 d A 21
C l e ar : N o 6 d 9 1 6 2 2 d 9 1 22 1 6 d A 6 1 22 d A 22
d/v : d 7 d 9 1 7 2 3 d 9 1 23 1 7 d A 7 1 23 d A 23
8 d 9 1 8 2 4 d 9 1 24 1 8 d A 8 1 24 d A 24
9 d 9 1 9 2 5 d 9 1 25 1 9 d A 9 1 25 d A 25
S o u rc e 10 d 9 1 10 2 6 d 9 1 26 1 10 d A 10 1 26 d A 26
Slot : 9 11 d 9 1 11 2 7 d 9 1 27 1 11 d A 11 1 27 d A 27
Port : 12 d 9 1 12 28 d 9 1 28 1 12 d A 12 1 28 d A 28
T.S. : 01 13 d 9 1 13 2 9 d 9 1 29 1 13 d A 13 1 29 d A 29
14 d 9 1 14 3 0 d 9 1 30 1 14 d A 14 1 30 d A 30
C o n fi r m? Y es 15 d 9 1 15 3 1 d 9 1 31 1 15 d A 15 1 31 d A 31
16 d 9 1 16 1 16 d A 16

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o C on t ro l ler Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

NOTE:
For voice cards, users do not have to select the time slot (T.S) data. The system will automatically adjust
the T.S number according to the port number you set up. T.S 01 is for port1, T.S 02 is for port 2…and
T.S 10 is for port 10. The T.S (time slot) number will always correspond to the port number.

After complete the TSI Map Setup, press ESC key, then the following screen shows up.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S ystem Setup (MAP) === 18:12:42 08/01/2011

P l ea s e u s e D -co m m an d ( n ex t scree n) to activate map as current map.

and V -co m m an d ( m ai n menu) to save maps to Flash memory.

CXR Page 70
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

> > Pr e ss an y k e y t o co n t in u e.

After you change the TSI Map, you need to go to Select a New TSI Map to activate the new map.

6.2.7.7. Select a New TSI Map

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (D) Select a New TSI Map

This function is to allow change the active map from previous setting.
Sample below shows the new setting on Map 1 will replace the previous Map 1 by select MAP_1 on Change to
TSI Map.

C X R Q X3 4 40 = == S ystem Setup (New map) === 18:29:51 08/01/2011

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS

L a st activated TSI Map: MAP_1

C h an g e to TSI Map : MAP_1

(T h is i te m wi l l b e i g no r ed if anyone of the following is enabled.)

[ TS I M a p] switch start hr/min

M ap 1 DISABLE 00:00
M ap 2 DISABLE 00:00
M ap 3 DISABLE 00:00
M ap 4 DISABLE 00:00

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o p re v io u s menu >>

Note: when the TSI Map switch function has been selected. The upper setting of “Change to TSI Map” will not
function.

The TSI Map setting shows below is function by Time duration setting. Sample below shows Map 1 enable
from 00:00 to 11:59 and then it will switch to Map 2 from 12:00 to 23:59. The map3 and map 4 will not function
due to disable.

[ TS I M a p] switch start hr/min

M ap 1 ENABLE 00:00
M ap 2 ENABLE 12:00
M ap 3 DISABLE 00:00
M ap 4 DISABLE 00:00

You can view the TSI Map setting from Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (C) Current TSI Map

6.2.7.8. Copy a TSI Map to another

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (E) Copy a TSI Map to Another

This function is to copy the TSI map from one to another.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S ys t em Setup (Copy) === 18:39:44 08/03/2011

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS

C op y T S I M ap from MAP_1 to MAP_2

CXR Page 71
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o C on t ro l ler Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

6.2.7.9. Clear a TSI Map

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (F) Clear a TSI Map

This function is to clear the selected TSI map setting.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = S y st e m Setup (Clear) === 19:09:12 03/01/2001

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS

C l ea r TSI Map : MAP_1

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o C on t ro l ler Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

6.2.7.10. Signaling Convert Table

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (J) Signaling Convert Table

This function is to configure a signaling conversion table. The QX3440 supports up to 4 (1~4) conversion
tables. Users can name the tables.
C X R Q X 34 4 0 S i g na l in g C o nvert Table Setup 11:46:07 08/19/2016
A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e o ptions by TAB, or by typing
T a b le In d ex : 1

T a b le Na m e : E 1 to T1 E S F E 1 t o T1 D4 T1 ESF to E1 T1 D4 to E1
* S ig 00 0 0 : 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0000 0000
S ig 00 0 1 : 0 0 0 1 0 00 0 0001 0000
S ig 00 1 0 : 0 0 1 0 0 00 0 0010 0000
S ig 00 1 1 : 0 0 1 1 0 00 0 0011 0000
S ig 01 0 0 : 0 1 0 0 0 10 1 0100 0101
* S ig 01 0 1 : 0 1 0 1 0 10 1 0101 0101
S ig 01 1 0 : 0 1 1 0 0 10 1 0110 0101
S ig 01 1 1 : 0 1 1 1 0 10 1 0111 0101
S ig 10 0 0 : 1 0 0 0 1 01 0 1000 1010
S ig 10 0 1 : 1 0 0 1 1 01 0 1001 1010
* S ig 10 1 0 : 1 0 1 0 1 01 0 1010 1010
S ig 10 1 1 : 1 0 1 1 1 01 0 1011 1010
S ig 11 0 0 : 1 1 0 0 1 11 1 1100 1111
S ig 11 0 1 : 1 1 0 1 1 11 1 1101 1111
S ig 11 1 0 : 1 1 1 0 1 11 1 1110 1111
* S ig 11 1 1 : 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1111 1111
N o t e: * F or T1 D 4 m ode , on l y ( CD = AB) working

< < Se l ec t T a bl e In d ex t h en ed i t, or ESC key to return >>

IMPORTANT:
Each port of one plug-in card only can enable one of three Protection functions: Link back up,
QDS1 1:1, and PDH ring.

6.2.7.11. Link back up

For Link back up screen, please refer to Appendix A.

6.2.7.12. QDS1 1:1 Protection

For QDS1 1:1 protection screen, please refer to Appendix C.

CXR Page 72
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

6.2.7.13. DS0-SNCP Setup

Follow the command path “Controller Menu> (S) System Setup> (K) DS0-SNCP Setup” to access DS0-SNCP
setup. Set DS0-SNCP to “ENABLE”, and set Action to “Create”. Then, press ENTER.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Setup === 09:49:51 10/09/2009

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE
Using Map: MAP_1
Action : Create

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Field Setting Options Default Notes

DS0-SNCP Disable, Enable Disable
Action Save, Create, Status, Save: save the current setup
Clear_Perf Create: DS0-SNCP creation
Status: show the current DS0-SNCP current status
Clear_Perf: Clear DS0-SNCP Performance

Note: For DS0-SNCP Setup, please refer to 3E1 manual for detail.
Select two 3E1 cards for DS0-SNCP circuit level protection and a particular plug-in card as the protected unit
and confirm with the setting.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Creation === 09:49:12 10/09/2009

Please Input decimal number (1~31), BACKSPACE to edit
Protection Group Creation, Using map 1 Total DS0-SNCP: 5
==============================================================================
Protected Slot: A ( E1 ) [.PPPPP..........................]
Port: NON-CAS
T.S.:01
Count:05

Primary Slot: 1 ( 3E1 ) [.WWWWW..........................]

Port:P1 NON-CAS Protection Delay: 00
T.S.:01 Upstream Send AIS: On

Secondary Slot: 2 ( 3E1 ) [.SSSSS..........................]

Port:P1 NON-CAS Protection Delay: 00
T.S.:01 Upstream Send AIS: On

Switch Mode :Non-revertible

Confirm :Yes

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Note1: “PDH Ring Protection” and “PDH Ring Diagnostic” are optional functions. To access these two
optional functions, you must order the controller card with PDH function, or these two functions will not show on
the VT100 menu. Also, only QE1, QT1, 1FOMA, FOM, and Mini QE1 plug-in cards support PDH function.
Note2: DS0-SNCP circuit level protection for 8UDTE card only supports TS and Omnibus mode.

6.2.7.14. PDH Ring Protection

Follow the command path “Controller Menu> (S) System Setup> (R) PDH Ring Protection” to access PDH
Ring Protection. Enable PDH ring protection, and set up the switching interval, station type and alarm filtering.

Under normal operating conditions, Alarm Filtering happens first due to alarm the system then switches to "ring
protection" mode. After that Switching Interval determines when to switch back to normal.

CXR QX3440 === PDH Ring Protection === 18:10:53 02/16/2012

ARROW KEYS: Cursor move; Change options by TAB, or by typing
PDH Ring Protection: ENABLE Ring Station : SLAVE
Switching Interval : 05 Alarm Filtering: 030
Slot(Model) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
============== ======= ======= ======= =======

CXR Page 73
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

A (MQuad E1 ) DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE

B ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
C ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
D ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
1 (Quad E1 ) ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE
2 (Quad E1 ) DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE
3 (Quad E1 ) DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE
4 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
5 (FOM ) ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE
6 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
7 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
8 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
9 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
10 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
11 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
12 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Field Option Default Notes

PDH Ring Protection Enable, Disable Disable
Alarm Filtering 0 to 180 second 0 Regardless of the alarm condition
within any contiguous Alarm Filtering
Interval, if the alarm condition exists at
the beginning and at the end of the
interval, then switching to ring
protection will occur.
Switching Interval 5 to 180 5 During the protection switching mode,
within any Switching Internal, if no
alarm condition exist throughout this
contiguous interval, then the system
will switch back to the normal
operating mode.
Ring Station Slave, Master Slave
Note: Alarm Filtering function is only available to QE1, QT1, and Mini QE1 cards.

6.2.7.15. PDH Ring Diagnostic

Follow the command path “Controller Menu> (S) System Setup> (T) PDH Ring Diagnostic” to access PDH
Ring Protection. This function allow user to do the PDH Ring Diagnostic between two nodes and not affect to
the data path in the ring.

CXR QX3440 === PDH Ring Diagnostic === 18:10:55 05/13/2013

ARROW KEYS: Cursor move; Change options by TAB, or by typing

Slot(Model) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

============== ======= ======= ======= =======
A ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
B ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
C ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
D (FT1 ) ------- ------- ------- -------
1 (Quad E1 ) Normal Normal DISABLE DISABLE
2 (Quad E1 ) DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE DISABLE
3 (3E1 ) ------- ------- ------- -------
4 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
5 (8DBRA ) ------- ------- ------- -------
6 (8DBRA ) ------- ------- ------- -------
7 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
8 (DC-B ) ------- ------- ------- -------
9 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
10 (DTE-A ) ------- ------- ------- -------
11 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
12 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Field Option Default Notes

CXR Page 74
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Port 1 to Port4 Normal, Diag-1, Diag-2 Normal The setup need to follow the same
sequence on both sides step by step.
Diag-1 means Diagnostic 1

An example is given on how to do the setup for PDH Ring Diagnostic.

Set PDH Ring Diagnostic

Node A between Node A and Node B

QE1

QE1

Node C Node B

Assume both Node A and Node B units use same Slot1/Card type(Quad E1)/Port1 to connect the link. The

1. Node A unit: Go to Controller Menu> (S) System Setup> (T) PDH Ring Diagnostic and change
normal to Diag-1 on slot 1/port1
2. Then, Node B unit: Go to Controller Menu> (S) System Setup> (T) PDH Ring Diagnostic and
change normal to Diag-1on slot 1/port1
3. Go back to Node A unit: Go to Controller Menu> (S) System Setup> (T) PDH Ring Diagnostic and
change normal to Diag-2 on slot 1/port1
4. Then, Node B unit: Go to Controller Menu> (S) System Setup> (T) PDH Ring Diagnostic and
change normal to Diag-2on slot 1/port1
5. The link between Node A and Node B is ready for diagnostic tests: TS Loopback, payload loopback,
line loopback and Bert test.
6. If you want to set the link between Node A and Node B back to normal. You need to do the same
step from 1 to 4 except from Diag-2 to Diag-1 and to Normal.

6.2.7.16. Inband Protection

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (M) Inband Protection

This function is to enable and setup the in-band DS0 protection function by create another standby inband
timeslot.

CXR Page 75
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Network Network
Management Center Management Center

Line
Working Backup Working
Break

E1 E1 E1 E1

Inband Inband

To enable the Inband Protection, go to (S) System Setup > (A) System Setup (System) under Network to select
Bridge Mode and Set WAN: ON first.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S y st e m S etup (SYSTEM) === 10:43:16 03/08/2013

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; P l ea s e I nput: hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy, BACKSPACE to edit
[ S y st e m]
T i m e/ D at e : 1 0: 4 3:1 6 03 / 08 / 20 1 3
D e v ic e N a me : C XR QX3 4 4 0
[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: B RI D GE
NI E N IP A dd r e ss S u bn e tM a sk Frame LB Timer
L A N : O N 19 2 .1 6 8 .0 1 1.0 5 3 2 5 5. 2 55 . 255.000 Ethernet
WAN :ON HDLC 00000001
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: N A G a te w ay IPAddr: 192.168.011.254
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D
[ C O NS O LE po r t]
B a u d R at e : 3 84 0 0
D a t a L en g th : 8 -B i ts
S t o p B it : 1 -B i t
P a r it y : N ON E
X O N _X O FF : X OF F

[ T S I m ap ] [Clock]
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : 1(B i d ir e ct i on ) Clock Mode : Normal
I d l e S ig n al l in g : 1 0 10

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

In Inband Protection Setup screen, there are two selections: Setup or Switch.

Field Description
Setup The setup screen enables the Protection Setup and configures Primary
(Slot/Port/Time Slot) and Secondary (Slot/Port/Time Slot) Inband Time Slot
info.
Switch The Inband Protection Status shows the working and backup current status.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = In b an d P rotection Setup === 17:45:01 05/10/2013

> > Se l ec t ? * S ET U P S WI T CH

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr evious menu >>

When the Setup has been selected, the Inband Protection Setup screen shows below.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = In b an d P rotection Setup === 14:59:19 03/22/2013

CXR Page 76
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e options by TAB, or by typing

P r o te c ti o n: EN A B LE
U s i ng Ma p : MA P _ 1

P ri m ar y S l ot : 5 ( Q u ad - E1 ) [.m..............................]
P o rt : P1 N O N -C A S
T . S. : 01

S e c on d ar y S l ot : 5 ( Q u ad - E1 ) [.m..............................]
P o rt : P2 N O N -C A S
T . S. : 01

Sw i tc h M o de : No n -re v e rt i bl e
A ct i on : Se t

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr evious menu > >

Field Option Default Note

Protection Enable, Disable Disable
Using Map Map 1 to 4 Map 1
Primary Slot/Port/T.S Same setup as TSI Map
Second Slot/Port/T.S
Switch Mode Non-revertible, Revertible Non-revertible
Action Set (will check map)
Clear (clear config and map)
Force (ignore exist map)

When the Switch has been selected, the Inband Protection Status screen shows below.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = In b an d P rotection Status === 17:51:37 05/10/2013

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e options by TAB, or by typing

P r o te c ti o n: EN A B LE
U s i ng Ma p : MA P _ 1

P ri m ar y S l ot : 1 WO R KI N G
P o rt : P1
T . S. : 1

S e c on d ar y S l ot : 2 BA C KU P
P o rt : P1
T . S. : 1

Sw i tc h M o de : No n -re v e rt i bl e
A ct i on : Sw i tch

< < ES C k e y i gn o r e a nd r e tu r n, EN TER key accept change >>

You can also go to Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (M) > Inband Protection Status to view the
current status.

Check Alarm Queue Summary: Controller Menu > (Q) Alarm Queue Summary, it will show the Inband Switch
alarm.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = A la r m Queue Summary === 18:22:36 05/13/2013

1 C T RL : M A JR : IN B AND S WI T CH to PRIMARY ------------------ 18:22:33 05/13/2013

2 C T RL : M A JR : IN B AND S WI T CH to SECONDARY ---------------- 18:22:21 05/13/2013

6.2.7.17. Command Line

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (L) Command Line

This function is for FAE support use and for license activation.

CXR Page 77
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Press "?", then press ENTER; the system will list all available commands. Then key in a desired command to
get the detail description. To return to the "Controller Setup" menu, press "q".

13:39:59 Apr 18/12 Replace

P r e ss ? g et he l p o r QU I T r e tu r n.
1 3 : 39 : 59 Ap r 1 8 / 12 >>?
A v a il a bl e C o mm a n ds :
q ui t h e lp p asscode arp ping
f ba n k f b oot u pgrade syslog auto_save
i na c ti v e c a ptu r e f ae_upload resume txtcfg
f or c e_ s yn c h w inf o f alicense
1 3 : 40 : 02 Ap r 1 8 / 12 >>h e l p
C o m ma n ds Su p po r t :
q ui t - - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > Q u it command support.
h el p - - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > T h is help message.
p as s co d e - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > P a ss code for debug mode (contact with FAE).
a rp -- - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > P r in t ARP table.
p in g i p - - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > P i ng an ip address.
f ba n k - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > D i sp l ay or set firmware bank in Flash.
f bo o t - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > D o wn l oad boot -up code (DANGER!!).
u pg r ad e c a rd - -- - --- - - - > B a tc h download firmware of card.
( T yp e 'upgrade ?' to see all upgrade commands)
s ys l og -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > D u mp system log.
a ut o _s a ve [s e c ] - --- - - -- > D i sp l ay or set auto - save time.
i na c ti v e [ se c ] - - --- - - -- > D i sp l ay or set detect time for card inactive.
p dh _ sp r in g - - - -- - --- - - -- > E n ab l e PDH - SPRing (need charge for password).
c ap t ur e - - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > C a pt u re FAE package and freeze system.
f ae _ up l oa d - - - -- - --- - - -- > U p lo a d FAE package.
r es u me -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > R e su m e (freeze) to operate.
t xt c fg -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > U p lo a d text mode configuration.
( F or view only, not for download)
f or c e_ s yn c - - -- - -- - -- - - - > Fo r ce dual -C P U sync and ignore hardware checking
h w i nf o d i sp CA R D - - --- - - > D is p lay HW info for export. (by JSON format)
h wi n fo up l oa d CA R D - - - -- > U p lo a d HW info via TFTP.
f al i ce n se im p o rt --- - - -- > I m po r t feature activation license data.
f al i ce n se do w n lo a d - - - -- > D o wn l oad license file via TFTP.

1 3 : 40 : 12 Ap r 1 8 / 12 >>

Note1: The top right corner, user can press TAB to switch Insert or Replace.
For example:
>> inactve  move cursor to ‘v’, TAB to insert, then press ‘i’, then the word become ‘inactive’
>> inactuve  move cursor to ‘u’, TAB to replace, then press ‘i’, then the word become ‘inactive’

Note2: For instructions of fae_upload, hwinfo disp CARD, hwinfo upload CARD, falicense import, and
falicense download screen, please refer to Appendix H.

CXR Page 78
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

6.2.7.18. SNTP Setup

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (N) SNTP Setup

This function is SNTP server setup. Simple Network Timing Protocol (SNTP) is an adaptation of the Network
Time Protocol (NTP) used to synchronize computer clocks in the Internet.

C X R Q X3 4 40 === SNTP setup === 09:17:12 02/20/2008

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B/ ` : R OLL UP/DOWN OPTIONS

S N T P O N/ O FF : OF F
S N T P s er v er 1 : 00 0 .00 0 . 00 0 .0 0 0
S N T P s er v er 2 : 00 0 .00 0 . 00 0 .0 0 0

S N T P t im e zo n e : +0

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

6.2.7.19. SYSLOG Setup

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (U) SYSLOG Setup

This function supports RFC5424 syslog. The syslog setup is to enable/disable the syslog function and keyin
the syslog server IP. Then you can view the syslog from syslog server. Suggest installing Kiwi Syslog Server
for Window Environment.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == SY S LOG Setup === 17:44:27 07/31/2012

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e o ptions by TAB, or by typing

S Y S LO G O N /O F F : ON
S Y S LO G S e rv e r : 19 2 .16 8 . 01 1 .0 0 5
S Y S LO G P o rt : UD P - 5 1 4

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

6.2.7.20. Power Setup

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (P) Power Setup

The default value is -48 V DC. Of the three kinds of power type: -48V DC, 125 V DC, and AC, the system of
QX3440 will not note the power type, so the user needs to choose it manually.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = P o we r Setup ===
1 7 : 45 : 58 08 / 21 / 2 00 7
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS

P o w er : T Y PE : - 4 8 V D C
P o w er : T Y PE : - 4 8 V D C

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious m enu >>

CXR Page 79
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

6.2.7.21. RADIUS Setup

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (V) RADIUS Setup

This function is to support Radius client function for user to login by the account registered at Radius Server via
console port of QX3440. To enable this function you need to set the account numbers at radius sever. Please
note that local accounts are able to log-in via serial console; however, local accounts cannot log-in when
Radius server is enabled to connect.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == RA D IUS setup === 16:50:48 03/22/2013

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e o ptions by TAB, or by typing

S er v er 1 : E N AB L E
IP: 1 9 2. 1 68. 0 1 1. 0 05
Ke y : T E ST 1 234 A B CD
P or t : 0 1 81 2

S er v er 2 : D I SA B LE
I P : 0 0 0. 0 00. 0 0 0. 0 00
Ke y :
P or t : 0 1 81 2

OP E RA T OR Pr i v il e ge L e ve l : 0 02
AD M IN Pr i v il e ge L e ve l : 0 05

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

Field Option Default Notes

Server1/2 Enable, Disable Disable
IP Server IP 0.0.0.0
Key Max 64 chars Empty
Port 1~65535 1812 (Radius port)
OPERATOR Privilege 0~255 2
Level
ADMIN Privilege 0~255 5
Level

6.2.7.22. Multicast Mapping Procedure

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (A) System to set up system configuration.

Then move the cursor at "TSI Function" option and use TAB or "`" key to set "TSI Function" as 1: N (Multicast).
Press ESC to return to the "Controller Setup" menu.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S y st e m S etup (SYSTEM) === 1 6:40:56 0 3/0 8/201 3

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
[ S y st e m]
T i m e/ D at e : 1 6: 4 0:5 7 0 3 / 08 / 20 1 3
D e v ic e N a me : C XR QX3 4 4 0

[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: R OU T ER
NI E N IP A dd r e ss S u bn e tM a sk Frame LB Timer
L A N : O N 01 0 .0 0 3 .0 2 3.0 9 5 2 5 5. 2 55 . 000.000 Ethernet
W A N : O FF 01 0 .0 0 4 .0 0 1.0 0 1 2 5 5. 2 55 . 255.000 HDLC 00000001
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: LAN G a te w ay IPAddr: 000.000.000.000
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D
[ C O NS O LE po r t]
B a u d R at e : 9 60 0
D a t a L en g th : 8 -B i ts
S t o p B it : 1 -B i t
P a r it y : N ON E
X O N _X O FF : X OF F

[ T S I m ap ]
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : N(M u l ti c as t ) Clock Mode : SSM
I d l e S ig n al l in g : 1 0 10

CXR Page 80
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

(Target) (Source)

Slot B Slot A
TSI Data/ Voice
TS01 TS01

Slot 1
TSI Port 1
TS01

QX3440

Then press "C" from the above "Controller Setup" menu to set system map. The following two screens show
map settings for the right side's example.

Below settings are for SlotA time slot 01 mapping to SlotB time slot 01 and SlotA time slot 01 mapping to
Slot1/Port1 time slot 01.
C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S y st e m S etup (SYSTEM) === 18:28:37 0 3/0 8/201 3
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , P l ea s e I nput: hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy, BACKSPACE to edit
[ S y st e m]
T i m e/ D at e : 1 8: 2 8:3 8 0 3 / 08 / 20 1 3
D e v ic e N a me : C XR QX3 4 4 0

[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: R OU T ER
NI E N IP A dd r e ss S u bn e tM a sk Frame LB Timer
L A N : O N 01 0 .0 0 3 .0 2 3.0 9 5 2 5 5. 2 55 . 000.000 Ethernet
W A N : O FF 01 0 .0 0 4 .0 0 1.0 0 1 2 5 5. 2 55 . 255.000 HDLC 00000001
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: LAN G a te w ay IPAddr: 000.000.000.000
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D
[ C O NS O LE po r t]
B a u d R at e : 9 60 0
D a t a L en g th : 8 -B i ts
S t o p B it : 1 -B i t
P a r it y : N ON E
X O N _X O FF : X OF F

[ T S I m ap ] [Clock]
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : 1(B i d ir e ct i on ) Clock Mode : Normal
I d l e S ig n al l in g : 1 0 10

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

Below setting is for mapping Slot A's time slot 01 to Slot B's time slot 01.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Sy s te m Setup (MAP) === 10:57:08 09/29/2011

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
M A P N O : M AP _ 1
Ta r g et E1 N O N - CAS Source E1 NON -C A S
T a r ge t PO / T S D SL / P O T S P O/ T S D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
S l o t : B == = = = = === = = == = = = == = = ========== ===== ========== ===== ========= =
Port : 1 d A 1 17 d 1 d 17 d
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d 2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d 3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d 4 d 20 d
T . S .# : 0 1 5 d 21 d 5 d 21 d
C l e ar : N o 6 d 22 d 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d 9 d 25 d
S o u rc e 10 d 26 d 10 d 26 d
Slot : A 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d
Port : 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d 13 d 29 d

CXR Page 81
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d
C o n fi r m? Y es 15 d 31 d 15 d 31 d
16 d 16 d

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o C on t ro l ler Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

Below setting is for mapping Slot A's time slot 01 to Slot 1/Port 1's time slot 01.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Sy s te m Setup (MAP) === 10:57:08 09/29/2011

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
M A P N O : M AP _ 1
Ta r g et Q ua d -E 1 N O N- CAS Source E1 NON -C A S
T a r ge t PO / T S D SL / P O T S P O/ T S D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
S l o t : 1 == = = = = === = = == = = = == = = ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P1 1 1 d A 1 17 d 1 d 17 d
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d 2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d 3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d 4 d 20 d
T . S .# : 0 1 5 d 21 d 5 d 21 d
C l e ar : N o 6 d 22 d 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d 9 d 25 d
S o u rc e 10 d 26 d 10 d 26 d
Slot : A 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d
Port : 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d
C o n fi r m? Y es 15 d 31 d 15 d 31 d
16 d 16 d

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o C on t ro l ler Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

Press "D" to enable this map as the current map.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Sy s te m Setup (MAP) === 14:49:50 02/21/2005

P l ea s e u s e D -co m m an d ( n ex t screen) to active map as current map.

and V -co m m an d ( m ai n menu) to save maps to Flash memory.

> > Pr e ss an y k e y t o co n t in u e.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S y st e m S etup (New map) === 14:55:34 09/30/2003

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS

L a st activated TSI Map: MAP_3

C h an g e to TSI Map : MAP_3

(T h is i te m wi l l b e i g no r ed if anyone of the following is enabled.)

[ TS I M a p] switch start hr/min

M ap 1 DISABLE 00:0 0
M ap 2 DISABLE 00:00
M ap 3 DISABLE 00:00
M ap 4 DISABLE 00:00

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o C on t ro l ler Setup menu, then Press D to active >>
Enable MAP_3 as the current TSI map. Then press "Y" to confirm the setting or "N" to abort. To save the new
map configuration to flash memory, press "V" from the "Controller Menu".

CXR Page 82
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S y st e m S etup (New map) === 14:55:34 09/30/2003

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS

L a st activated TSI Map: MAP_3

C h an g e to TSI Map : MAP_3

(T h is i te m wi l l b e i g no r ed if anyone of the following is enabled.)

[ TS I M a p] switch start hr/min

M ap 1 DISABLE 00:00
M ap 2 D ISABLE 00:00
M ap 3 ENABLE 00:00
M ap 4 DISABLE 00:00

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o C on t ro l ler Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

6.2.8 System Alarm Setup

Under the Controller Menu, press “M” to set up system alarm as below. The alarm action includes “Disable”,
“Enable” and “EN_NEW”, each supports different alarm commands. Please refer to Appendix D "Alarm Setup
Indication" for setup detail.

The Alarm Relay is applied to configure the Alarm Relay output present on the front panel of QX3440 controller.
The alarm relay circuit will be triggered when an alarm is detected. To return the alarm relay to the normal state,
the user has three options to choose from. The detailed description for each option is listed below:

AUTO: The alarm relay will return to normal state in 1 minute once the problem of all detected alarm is solved.
To check the alarm status, see the (Q) Alarm Queue Summary screen. The alarm status “clear” indicates the
problem of the alarm s is solved.
Note: The alarm referred above is those which could be auto-cleared. For detailed information, please refer to
Table 6-2 Auto-Cleared Alarm Types.

CXR Page 83
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Table 6-2 Auto-Cleared Alarm Types

Alarm Type of QX3440
Alarm: Enable Relay : Auto Alarm severity level: Critical/Major
Card Type : CTRL Card
Alarm Type Alarm Queue summary
DUAL-CPU ALARM Rudundant Loss/insert
Power Alarm Redundant Power fail/recover
Clock Alarm (for normal clock only) Clock loss/recovered
Slot inactive Slot no work/slot startup
Slot Startup
Card Type : all E1/T1 card (FE1/QE1/3E1)
Alarm Type Alarm Queue summary
LOS LOS/LOS remove
LOF LOF/LOF remove
AIS AIS/AIS remove
RAI RAI/RAI remove
Card Type : HDSL card
Alarm Type Alarm Queue summary
“LOS,MASTER-LOOP” LOS,MASTER LOOP
/LOS,MASTER LOOP remove
“LOS,SALVE-LOOP LOS,SLAVE LOOP/LOS,SALVE LOOP
remove
Card Type : G.shdsl card
Alarm Type Alarm Queue summary
“LOS,MASTER-LOOP1” LOS,MASTER-LOOP1
/LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 remove
“LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1
/LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 remove
“LOS,MASTER-LOOP2” LOS,MASTER-LOOP2
/LOS,MASTER-LOOP2 remove
“LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2” LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2
/LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2 remove
Card Type : DTU card
Alarm Type Alarm Queue summary
Unsync Unsync/Unsync remove
Card Type : G.703 card
Alarm Type Alarm Queue summary
LOS LOS/LOS remove
Card Type : RTA/RTB/RT card
Alarm Type Alarm Queue summary
LAN-Link down Link up/down
Card Type : DTE card
Alarm Type Alarm Queue summary
Unit 1 : Major Unsync/Unsync remove.

CXR Page 84
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

PERIOD: The user has to set up a time limit first, and the default setting is 2 seconds. That means the alarm
relay will return to normal condition after 2 seconds the alarm is detected.

MANUAL: When alarms are detected and reported to CTRL card , the user has to cut off all the alarms
manually by pressing the ACO button on the controller’s front panel, or by activating “(A) Alarm Cut off “ from
the main menu. Then, the alarm relay will return to the normal state.

DISABLE: The alarm relay will remain disabled when alarms occur.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = Sy s te m A larm Setup === 18:18:54 09/30/2010

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO LL OPTIONS

[ A l ar m A c ti o n]
A L A RM : EN A BLE
R E L AY : PE R IOD PERIOD (s): 2

[ A l ar m T y pe ]
A L A RM CU T O F F : MA J OR
S L O T I NA C TI V E : MA J OR
S L O T S TA R T- U P : MA J OR
C L O CK LO S S : MA J OR
L I N K S WI T CH : MA J OR
M A P S W IT C H : MA J OR
P O W ER AL A RM : MA J OR
T Y P E M IS M AT C H : MA J OR
D U A L- C PU AL A RM : MA J OR
M A N AG E ME N T A LM : MA J OR

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr evious menu >>

6.2.9 Firmware Transfer

Under the Controller Menu, press “W” to enter in the screen of File Transfer as below.

Note: Check the current hardware version before firmware upgrade. Make sure the existing hardware
version is compatible to the updated firmware version. For more details, please contact CXR.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = F il e Transfer === 14:51:25 12/12/2011

A -> D o wn l oad Mainboard Firmware

C -> D o wn l oad Configuration
D -> U p lo a d Configuration
E -> D o wn l oad Mainboard Boot -u p
R -> C o py Firmware to Redundant

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n Menu or enter a command >>

6.2.9.1. Download Mainboard Firmware

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = D o wn l oa d Firmware === 10:38:01 12 / 1 3/2011

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , B A CK S PA C E to edit, ESC to abort

F i r mw a re 1 V er s i on : V 8. 1 7. 0 3 0 7/20/2011
F i r mw a re 2 V er s i on : V 8. 1 8. 0 2 0 9/19/2011
C u r re n t F ir m wa r e B a nk: 2
N e x t B oo t F i rm w a re : 2
T F T P S er v er IP : 1 0. 3 .2 3 .1
F i r mw a re Fi l e N a me : v 8. 1 9. 0 1. r un

1 0: 4 0 :1 0 12 / 1 3/ 1 1 Do w nloading firmware .Received 471 Blocks

1 0: 4 0 :1 3 12 / 1 3/ 1 1 Re c eived 241297 bytes
1 0: 4 0 :1 3 12 / 1 3/ 1 1 Ch e cksum ok.
1 0: 4 0 :1 3 12 / 1 3/ 1 1 Wr i te firmware file to flash: 57%

CXR Page 85
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

< < ES C k e y i gn o r e a nd r e tu r n, EN T ER key accept change >>

6.2.9.2. Application of upload / download configuration

The configuration of a properly set up QX3440 device can be quickly uploaded to a TFTP server and then
downloaded to other QX3440 devices even if they are not loaded with plug-in cards. This simplifies the set up
for mass deployment of new devices, each with same plug-in card and same configuration.

By using the “I” command in the controller menu of one of the newly deployed devices a user can retrieve the
plug-in card types for which the downloaded configuration will need. The sample screen is shown below.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = I nf o rm a tion Su mmary === 14:52:20 09/19/2011

Slot C ar d /I n te r f ac e Se r ia l Software Version Registered Card

==== = == = == = == = = == = == == = == = = ================== ===============
A F E1 12 0 oh m N/ A V 4.02.05 12/17/2010 FE1
B F E1 12 0 oh m N/ A V 3.05.01 09/21/2007 FE1
C
D FOM unplugged

==== = == = == = == = = == = == == = == = = ================== ===============

1 Q ua d E 1 V 3.test2 06/17/ 2011 8DBRA mismatch
2
3
4
5 F OM N/ A FOM
6 F OM N/ A FOM
7
8
9 Quad E1 unplugged
10 Q ua d E 1 01 0 59 4 V 3.test2 06/17/2011 Quad E1
11
12

< < ES C k e y t o r e tu r n t o pr e vi o us menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>

Upload Configuration

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = U pl o ad Configuration === 14:53:05 09/19/2011

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , P l ea s e I nput: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

T F T P S er v er IP : 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0.000
C o n fi g F i le Na m e :

< < ES C k e y i gn o r e a nd r e tu r n, EN T ER key accept change >>

Download Configuration

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = D o wn l oa d Configuration === 14:53:39 09/19/2011

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , P l ea s e I nput: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

CXR Page 86
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

T F T P S er v er IP : 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0.000
C o n fi g F i le Na m e :

< < ES C k e y i gn o r e a nd r e tu r n, EN T ER key accept change >>

6.2.9.3. Copy Firmware to Redundant

After completed the download firmware, the Copy Firmware to Redundant Board screen will be shown. Press
Yes to copy the new firmware to Redundant controller. If the device only has one controller, this screen won’t
show up.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = C op y Fi r m wa r e t o R edundant Board=== 10:41:27 1 2 / 1 3 / 2011

C u rr e nt Fi r mw a r e B ank : 2
N e xt B oo t Fi r mw a r e B ank : 1

= = = > T ra n sf e rr i n g F irm w a re to Re d undant Board

1 0 0 % Tr a ns f er C om p let e !

= = = > P ro g ra m mi n g t h e F l a sh in Re d undant Board

1 0 0 % Pr o gr a mm i n g C omp l e te !
R e m em b er to Re b o ot to R u n t he Ne w Firmware !

= = > > E nt e r p as s w or d : X X XX X

6.2.9.4. Download Firmware Procedure

To download firmware using SNMP port via CXRTerm, use the follow procedure:

Single controller:

1 Setup the VT-100 connection

2 Setup TFTP server in PC
3 Download the firmware file: xxxxxx.run
4 Do warm reset primary controller board
5 Firmware download procedure complete

Dual Controllers:

1 Setup the VT-100 connection

2 Setup TFTP server in PC
3 Download the firmware file: xxxxxx.run

CXR Page 87
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

4 Copy Firmware to redundant board

5 Do warm reset in primary controller board
6 Firmware download for the primary controller board procedure complete
7 Do reset in redundant board
8 Firmware downloads for the redundant controller board procedure complete.

Note: The name of the run code file name will be provided by CXR and will vary.

The following step by step procedure uses dual controller device as example.
Note: The Dual controller procedure includes the Single controller procedure.

Download Firmware File with dual Controller Cards:

1. Command Path: Controller Menu > (W) Firmware Transfer > (A) Download Mainboard Firmware

2. When the Download Firmware screen appears, key-in the TFTP Server IP number and Firmware File
Name: xxxxxx.run. (this example use v8.19.01.run) Then press Enter to start process the download. The
screen shown below is Firmware Downloading

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = D o wn l oa d F irmware === 10:38:01 12 / 1 3/2011

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , B A CK S PA C E to edit, ESC to abort

F i r mw a re 1 V er s i on : V 8. 1 7. 0 3 0 7/ 20/2011
F i r mw a re 2 V er s i on : V 8. 1 8. 0 2 0 9/ 19/2011
C u r re n t F ir m wa r e B a nk: 2
N e x t B oo t F i rm w a re : 2
T F T P S er v er IP : 1 0. 3 .2 3 .1
F i r mw a re Fi l e N a me : v 8. 1 9. 0 1. r un

1 0: 4 0 :1 0 12 / 1 3/ 1 1 Do w nl oading firmware .Received 471 Blocks

1 0: 4 0 :1 3 12 / 1 3/ 1 1 Re c ei ved 241297 bytes
1 0: 4 0 :1 3 12 / 1 3/ 1 1 Ch e ck sum ok.
1 0: 4 0 :1 3 12 / 1 3/ 1 1 Wr i te firmware file to flash: 57%

< < ES C k e y i gn o r e a nd r e tu r n, EN T ER key accept change >>

3. After completed the download firmware, the Copy Firmware to Redundant Board screen will be shown.
Press Yes to copy the new firmware to Redundant controller. If the device only has controller, this screen
won’t show up.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == C op y Fi r mw a re t o Redundant Board=== 10:41:27 12 / 1 3/ 2011

C u rr e nt Fi r mw a r e B ank : 2
N e xt B oo t Fi r mw a r e B ank : 1

C o py fi r mw a re t o R edu n d an t B o ar d - are you sure ?

CXR Page 88
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

4. The screen shows the process of transferring firmware to redundant controller. If password protected,
you need to key-in the password.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = =C o py F i rm w ar e t o Redundant Board=== 10:41:27 12 / 1 3/ 2011

C u rr e nt Fi r mw a r e B ank : 2
N e xt B oo t Fi r mw a r e B ank : 1

= = = > T ra n sf e rr i n g F irm w a re to Re d un dant Board

1 0 0 % Tr a ns f er C om p let e !

= = = > P ro g ra m mi n g t h e F l a sh in Re d un dant Board

1 0 0 % Pr o gr a mm i n g C omp l e te !
R e m em b er to Re b o ot to R u n t he Ne w F irmware !

= = > > E nt e r p as s w or d : X X XX X

5. The firmware download procedure has completed.

Configure the Controller Reset

1. Command Path: Controller Menu > (Z) Controller Reset

2. The Reset Control Board screen appears. Select Primary and Warm Restart and then press Enter. The
screen shows Warm Reset: S a v i ng wo rkin g configuration . . . Reseting...

C X R Q X3 4 40 == = R e se t Co n t rol Board === 14:52:10 02/29/2012

> > Se l ec t ? R ed u nda n t * P ri m ar y System

> > Re s ta r t M od e ? *W a r m R es t ar t Cold Restart
= = = > W ar m R e se t : S a vin g wo r ki n g c on figuration...Reseting...

Note: For firmware download procedure, Warm Restart is recommended.

CXR Page 89
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

3. After few minutes, the device will automatically load the system hardware configuration.

The initial system configure screen with following screen.

B o a rd _ Sl o t= 0
P r e ss AC O k e y t o l o ad d e fa u lt co n fi guration...3...2...1...
I n i t S ys t em Co n f ig u rat i o n. . .. . Lo a d Previous
W a r m R es t ar t .. .
R e d un d an t b o ar d . .. . .
E n d t a sk Pr o cH b D at a ... . . .
e v R ed T oP r i h ap p e ne d du r i ng in i ti a li zation......
R e d un d an t -> P ri m a ry tak e o ve r !
T e s ti n g a nd In i t D M 900 0 - E th e rn e t controller...OK!
I n i t S CC 1 - HD L C p o rt . . .v 3 my e ng i ne block: unable to install engine info

I n i t R S4 8 5 S CC 4 . ..
T r i gg e r a ll Ta s k .. .
E n a bl e R S 48 5 a n d E t her n e t . ..
I n i t M as t er Cl o c k . ..

4. Press (Z) Controller Reset to reset the redundant Controller Card. Select Redundant and key-in
password (default password: cxr). Please wait for approximate 3 minutes for next screen to show up.

C X R QX 3 4 40 = = = R e se t C on t rol Board === 14:52:10 02/29/2012

> > Se l ec t ? * R ed u nda n t P ri m ar y System

= = > > E nt e r p as s w or d : X X XX X
5. The screen shows the Redundant is synchronizing with Primary. Please wait.

R edu n d an t i s s y nc hronizing with Primary...

(d o n' t in s ert a ny ca r d d ur ing this synchronizing process)

. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . ... . . .. . .. . .. . .. .......................................

CXR Page 90
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

6. The screen will return to Controller Menu when the redundant Controller Reset function is complete. Now
the software version has upgraded to V8.34.01.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Co n tr o ll er Menu === 10:57:37 8 / 13 / 201 4

S e r ia l N u mb e r : 1 235 6 7 Redundant Controller: Enabled

H a r dw a re Ve r si o n : V er. J Start Time : 10:48:31 1 2 / 13 / 2011
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n : V 8. 3 4 . 01 Device Name: CXR QX3440

[ D I SP L AY ] [SETUP]
C - > S ys t em Co n f ig u rat i o n S - > System Setup
B - > C lo c k s ou r c e C onf i g ur a ti o n M - > System Alarm Setup
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e S u mma r y W - > Firmware Transfer
I - > I nf o rm a ti o n S u mma r y V - > Store/Retrieve Configuration
R - > R ed u nd a nt C TR L In f o rm a ti o n K - > Clock source Setup
P - > P er f or m an c e R e por t T - > Bit Error Rate Test

[ L O G] [MI S C ]
F - > L og Of f A - > Alarm Cut Off
O - > L og On X - > Clear Alarm Queue
U - > C ho o se a S l ot Y - > Controller Return to Default
Z - > Controller Reset

> > S PA C E b ar to r ef r esh o r e nt e r a c ommand ===>

6.2.9.5. Controller (CTRL) Firmware Synchronization

Operating the QX3440 with different controller firmware might cause traffic loss if the working CTRL fails.
Please refer to the following procedure for the controller firmware synchronization.

1. From Controller menu, at the top of screen, the Software Version is the working controller
firmware version, record it if necessary.
2. From Controller menu, select R-> Redundant CTRL Information, it shows the redundant
controller firmware version, record it if necessary.
3. If the controller version on both controllers is not the same, from Controller menu, select
W->Firmware Transfer
4. From Firmware Transfer menu, select R -> Copy Firmware to Redundant
5. Press Y to copy the working controller firmware to redundant controller.
6. Wait for the copy to complete
7. The screen will show
===> Transferring Firmware to Redundant Board
100% Transfer Complete !
===> Programming the Flash in Redundant Board
100% Programming Complete !
Remember to Reboot to Run the New Firmware !
8. From Controller Menu, select Z-> Controller Reset
9. From Controller Reset menu, select option: Redundant to reset the redundant CTRL and
activate the new firmware
Note: Warm Restart is recommended.
10. While resetting, the screen shows
Redundant is synchronizing with Primary...
(Don’t insert any card during this synchronizing process)

Note: During the synchronization, QX3440 does not respond to VT-100, Telnet, and SSH.
The synchronization procedure takes approximate 3 minutes to complete. After
synchronization completes, the system responds to VT-100, Telnet, and SSH.

11. From Controller menu, check the software version at the top and select R-> Redundant
CTRL Information to verify the firmware version.

CXR Page 91
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

6.2.10 Store/ Retrieve Configuration

Under the Controller Menu, press “V” to store or retrieve the current configuration as the following
screen shows. Use TAB key to select STORE or RETRIEVE, press ENTER. The current selection will
be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

Store Configuration:

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = S to r e/ R et r ieve Configuration=== 19:09:51 03/01/2001

> > Se l ec t ? * S TO R E R ET R IE V E

Then the system will prompt the following message, shown in the bottom line. Enter “Y” to confirm the setting or
“N” to abort.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = S to r e/ R et r ieve Configuration=== 19:09:51 03/01/2001

> > Se l ec t ? * S TO R E R ET R IE V E
> > St o re Cu r re n t C o nfi g u ra t io n ? [Y/N]

Press “Y” from the above screen, then enter password in the following screen. The default password is cxr.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = ==S t o re / Re t ri e ve Configuration=== 16:43:26 02/20/2004

> > Se l ec t ? * S TO R E R ET R IE V E
= = > > E nt e r p as s w or d : X X XX

Then press ENTER from the above screen, the configuration is saved.

CX R Q X 34 4 0 = = = St o re / Re t rieve Configuration=== 16:43:26 02/20/2004

> > Se l ec t ? * S TO R E R ET R IE V E
= = > > S av i ng . ..

CXR Page 92
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Retrieve Configuration:

Use arrow keys to move the cursor at “RETRIEVE”, which will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = S to r e/ R et r ieve Configuration=== 19:09:51 03/01/2001

> > Se l ec t ? S TO R E * R ET R IE V E

Press ENTER from the above screen. Then press “Y” to retrieve last stored configuration, or “N” to abort it.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = ==S t o re / Re t ri e ve Configuration=== 16:45:31 02/20/2004

> > Se l ec t ? S TO R E * R ET R IE V E
> > Re t ri e ve La s t S t ore d Co n fi g ur a tion ? [Y/N]

Press “Y” from the above screen, then enter password in the following screen. The default password is cxr.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = ==S t o re / Re t ri e ve Configuration=== 16:45:31 02/20/2004

> > Se l ec t ? S TO R E * R ET R IE V E
= = > > E nt e r p as s w or d : X X XX

Then press ENTER from the above screen, the configuration is retrieved.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = ==S t o re / Re t ri e ve Configuration=== 16:45:31 02/20/2004

> > Se l ec t ? S TO R E * R ET R IE V E
= = = > R et r ie v in g .. . ...

CXR Page 93
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

6.2.11 Clock Mode Setup

Controller Menu > (K) Clock Source Setup > (A) Clock Mode Setup

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Cl o ck Source Setup === 09:54:39 08/18/2014

A - > C l oc k M o de Setup
B - > C l oc k S o urce Setup

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n Menu or enter a command >>

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = C l oc k Mode Setup === 11:14:59 08/18/2014

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e o ptions by TAB, or by typing

C l o ck Mo d e: No r m al

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

6.2.12 Clock Source Setup

Controller Menu > (K) Clock Source Setup > (B) Clock Source Setup

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Cl o ck Source Setup === 09:54:39 08/18/2014

A - > C l oc k M o de Setup
B - > C l oc k S o urce Setup

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n Menu or enter a command >>

 For Normal Clock Mode:

Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press “A” to get in "System Setup (SYSTEM)" menu, as below screen
shows. Use arrow keys to move the cursor at "Clock Mode" item and TAB key to choose "Normal" option.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S y st e m S etup (SYSTEM) === 09:39:08 0 3/0 8/201 3

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
[ S y st e m]
T i m e/ D at e : 0 9: 3 9:0 8 08 / 18 / 20 1 0
D e v ic e N a me : C XR QX3 4 4 0

[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: R OU T ER
NI E N IP A dd r e ss S u bn e tM a sk Frame LB Timer
L A N : O N 01 0 .0 0 3 .0 2 3.0 1 0 2 5 5. 2 55 . 000.000 Ethernet
W A N : O FF 02 0 .0 0 1 .0 0 1.0 0 2 2 5 5. 2 55 . 000.000 HDLC 00000001
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: LAN G a te w ay IPAddr: 000.000.000.000
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D N o te : S l ot D port 4 can't use unframe mode!
[ C O NS O LE po r t]
B a u d R at e : 3 84 0 0
D a t a L en g th : 8 -B i ts

CXR Page 94
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

S t o p B it : 1 -B i t
P a r it y : N ON E
X O N _X O FF : X OF F

[ T S I m ap ] [Clock]
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : 1(B i d ir e ct i on ) Clock Mode : Normal
I d l e S ig n al l in g : 1 0 10

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu > >

Press ESC key from the above screen. Then press "Y" to confirm the new setting or "N" to abort.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S y st e m S etup (SYSTEM) === 09:39:08 0 3/0 8/201 3

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
[ S y st e m]
T i m e/ D at e : 0 9: 3 9:0 8 0 3 / 08 / 20 1 3
D e v ic e N a me : C XR QX3 4 4 0

[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: R OU T ER
NI E N IP A dd r e ss S u bn e tM a sk Frame LB Timer
L A N : O N 01 0 .0 0 3 .0 2 3.0 1 0 2 5 5. 2 55 . 000.000 Ethernet
W A N : O FF 02 0 .0 0 1 .0 0 1.0 0 2 2 5 5. 2 55 . 000.000 HDLC 00000001
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: LAN G a te w ay IPAddr: 000.000.000.000
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D N ot e : S lot D port 4 can't use unframe mode!
[ C O NS O LE po r t]
B a u d R at e : 3 84 0 0
D a t a L en g th : 8 -B i ts
S t o p B it : 1 -B i t
P a r it y : N ON E
X O N _X O FF : X OF F

[ T S I m ap ] [Clock]
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : 1(B i d ir e ct i on ) Clock Mode : Normal
I d l e S ig n al l in g : 1 0 10

> > Ch a ng e c o nf i g ur a tio n (Y / N) ? ( N ote:to save,please use V - command)

Under the "Controller Menu", press “K” to do clock source setup. Then the following screen will show up.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = Sy s t em Se t up (CLOCK - Normal Mode) ===14:14:07 09/09/2008

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS

M a s te r _C l k S ou r c e : SL O T _6 P1 Clock Hold -Over: ON

S e c on d _C l k S ou r c e : IN T E RN A L
C u r re n t C lo c k : MA S T ER _ CL K
C l k _R e co v er _ Mo d e : AU T O MA T IC
C l o ck St a tu s : NO R M AL
E x t . C lo c k T yp e : E1 ( 7 5o h m)
D u a l E xt e rn a l C l oc k Pr o t ec t io n : Disable

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

CXR Page 95
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Configuration options:

Configuration Option Default

Master_Clk Source INTERNAL, EXTERNAL, Line Interfacenote1 INTERNAL
Second_Clk Source INTERNAL, EXTERNAL, Line Interfacenote1 INTERNAL
Current Clock MASTER_CLK, SECOND_ CLK, INTERNAL MASTER_CLK
Clk_Recover_Mode AUTOMATIC, MANUAL MANUAL
Clock Ext. Clock Type E1 (75 ohm), E1 (120 ohm), T1, E1 (75 ohm)
2048 KHz (75 ohm), 2048 KHz (120 ohm)
Dual External Clock Disable, Enable Disable
Protection
Clock Hold-Over ON, OFF OFF

Note:

1. Clock Hold-Over option is for 3E1 plug-in card only. It appears on VT100 screen when the controller
hardware version J and software version 8.02.01 or newer version.
2. Clock Hold-Over mode is configured to OFF. The operation of system clock show as below.
When the master clock loss occurs, the system clock will switch to secondary clock. When the
secondary clock loss occurs, the system clock will switch to internal clock.

Clock Hold-Over mode is configured to ON. The operation of system clock has shown as below.
When the frequency accuracy of system clock is over 198 ppm, the system clock will enter to
Hold-Over mode. When the frequency accuracy of system clock is lower than 198 ppm, the system
clock will track the reference clock.
3. CXR-QX3440 is a DCS that only requires Stratum 3 clock accuracy and holdover. Please refer to table
below.

Stratum Level Free-Run Accuracy Holdover per Day in 1st 24 Hrs Slip Rate @ DS-1 Rate
1 1x10-11 N/A ≤ 1 Slip/72 days
2 1.6x10-8 1x10-10 ≤ 1 Slip/13 days
3E 4.6x10-6 1x10-8 ≤7 Slips/1 day
3 4.6x10-6 3.7x10-7 ≤255 Slips/1day
4 32x10-6 N/A N/A

Note1: Line Interface = Quad E1/T1, mini Quad E1, FOM, 1FOMA card, or the port 1 to port 4 of 6-port
V.35/V.36 card.

 For SSM (Synchronous Status Message) Clock Mode:

Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press “A” to get in "System Setup (SYSTEM)" menu, as below screen
shows. Use arrow keys to move the cursor at "Clock Mode" item and TAB key to choose "SSM" option.
Note that the SSM clock mode is only available for Quad E1 plug-in card and mini Quad E1 plug-in card.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S y st e m S etup (SYSTEM) === 09:39:08 0 3/0 8/201 3

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
[ S y st e m]
T i m e/ D at e : 0 9: 3 9:0 8 0 3 / 08 / 20 1 3
D e v ic e N a me : C XR QX3 4 4 0

[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: R OU T ER
NI E N IP A dd r e ss S u bn e tM a sk Frame LB Timer
L A N : O N 01 0 .0 0 3 .0 2 3.0 1 0 2 5 5. 2 55 . 000.000 Ethernet
W A N : O FF 02 0 .0 0 1 .0 0 1.0 0 2 2 5 5. 2 55 . 000.000 HDLC 00000001
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: LAN G a te w ay IPAddr: 000.000.000.000
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D N o te : S l ot D port 4 can't use unframe mode!

[ C O NS O LE po r t]
B a u d R at e : 3 84 0 0
D a t a L en g th : 8 -B i ts
S t o p B it : 1 -B i t
P a r it y : N ON E

CXR Page 96
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

X O N _X O FF : X OF F

[ T S I m ap ] [Clock]
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : 1(B i d ir e ct i on ) Clock Mode : SSM
I d l e S ig n al l in g : 1 0 10

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

Press ESC key from the above screen. Then press "Y" to confirm the new setting or "N" to abort.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S y st e m S etup (SYSTEM) === 09:39:08 0 3/0 8/201 3

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
[ S y st e m]
T i m e/ D at e : 0 9: 3 9:0 8 03 / 08 / 20 1 3
D e v ic e N a me : C XR QX3 4 4 0

[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: R OU T ER
NI E N IP A dd r e ss S u bn e tM a sk Frame LB Timer
L A N : O N 01 0 .0 0 3 .0 2 3.0 1 0 2 5 5. 2 55 . 000.000 Ethernet
W A N : O FF 02 0 .0 0 1 .0 0 1.0 0 2 2 5 5. 2 55 . 000.000 HDLC 00000001
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: LAN G a te w ay IPAddr: 000.000.000.000
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D N o te : S l ot D port 4 can't use unframe mode!
[ C O NS O LE po r t]
B a u d R at e : 3 84 0 0
D a t a L en g th : 8 -B i ts
S t o p B it : 1 -B i t
P a r it y : N ON E
X O N _X O FF : X OF F

[ T S I m ap ] [Clock]
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : 1(B i d ir e ct i on ) Clock Mode : SSM
I d l e S ig n al l in g : 1 0 10

> > Ch a ng e c o nf i g ur a tio n (Y / N) ? ( N ote:to save,please use V - command)

Then exit from the above menu after keying "Y" to confirm the latest system configuration.

Go to Quad E1's Port Menu. Under the "Port Menu", press “P” to select the E1/T1 port and then press "S" to
get in the "Unit System Setup" menu. Use arrow key to move the cursor at the "FDL" item, and TAB key to
select "SSM" option.

S L O T 7 Q u ad - E1 P OR T 1 = == Po r t System Setup === 16:51:00 04/25/2008

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS

F RA M E = ON
C OD E = H D B3
C RC = ON
R AI = ON
A IS = F R AME D
C AS = ON
S IG N AL L IN G = C D =01
C GA = N O RM
O OS = B U SY
F DL = S SM
S a_ b it = Sa4
I DL E = D5
P ro t ec t ed = D I SAB L E
M as t er = * * **
I NT F = 7 5 Oh m

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

Then back to the "Controller Menu", press “K” to do clock source setup. Then the following screen will show up.
This menu is allowed to set up first, second, and third clock sources. The "SLOT_9 P1" means port 1 of slot 9.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = C l o ck So u rc e Setup (SSM Mode) === 09:59:55 08/18/2014

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e o ptions by TAB, or by typing

CXR Page 97
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

F ir s t C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _ 9 P1 (Dynamic SSM)
S e co n d C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _2 P1 (Static SSM)
T hi r d C lo c k S o ur c e : N ON E
C u rr e nt C lo c k : F IR S T_ C LK
C lo c k S t at u s : N OR M AL
C lo c k H ol d - Ov e r : O FF

[ S t at i c S SM me s s ag e ]
I n t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
L i ne Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x te r na l Cl o ck T y pe : E 1 (7 5 ohm)

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

Field Setting Options

First Clock Source NONE, INTERNAL, EXTERNAL, Line Interfacenote
Second Clock Source NONE, INTERNAL, EXTERNAL, Line Interfacenote
Third Clock Source NONE, INTERNAL, EXTERNAL, Line Interfacenote
Internal Clock SSM Message Input 0~9, A-F
SSM code (please refer to SSM code for E1 Operation
table below)
External Clock SSM Message SSM code (please refer to SSM code for E1 Operation
table below)
External Clock Type E1(75ohm), E1(120ohm), T1, 2048KHz(75ohm),
2048KHz(120ohm),

Note: In the CLOCK-SSM Mode, the Line Interface is Quad E1/T1, mini Quad E1, FOM, or 1FOMA.

CXR Page 98
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

QX3440 QE1 QE1

Unit 2 Port 4

Port 3

Port 2

Port 1

QX3440 QE1 E1 Network

Unit 1 Port 4

Port 3

Port 2

Port 1

Unit 1 clock source setting Unit 2 clock source setting

 First Clock Source: slot1 port3  First Clock Source: slot1 port1
 Second Clock Source: slot1 port 1  Second Clock Source: Internal
 Third Clock Source: internal  Third Clock Source: None

The Unit 1 setting screen shown below, SLOT_1 P1 is the current clock.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = C l o ck So u rc e Setup (SSM Mode) === 09:59:55 08/18/2014

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e o ptions by TAB, or by typing

F ir s t C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _1 P1 (Dynamic SSM)
S e co n d C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _2 P1 (Static SSM)
T hi r d C lo c k S o ur c e : N ON E
C u rr e nt C lo c k : F IR S T_ C LK
C lo c k S t at u s : N OR M AL
C lo c k H ol d - Ov e r : O FF

[ S t at i c S SM me s s ag e ]
I n t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
L i ne Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x te r na l Cl o ck T y pe : E 1 (7 5 ohm)

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

The Unit 2 setting screen shown below, SLOT_1 P1 is the current clock.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = C l o ck So u rc e Setup (SSM Mode) === 09:59:55 08/18/2014

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e o ptions by TAB, or by typing

F ir s t C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _1 P1 (Dynamic SSM)
S e co n d C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _2 P1 (Static SSM)
T hi r d C lo c k S o ur c e : N ON E
C u rr e nt C lo c k : F IR S T_ C LK
C lo c k S t at u s : N OR M AL

CXR Page 99
6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

C lo c k H ol d - Ov e r : O FF

[ S t at i c S SM me s s ag e ]
I n t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
L i ne Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x te r na l Cl o ck T y pe : E 1 (7 5 ohm)

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vious menu >>

SSM code for E1 Operation

Quality Level Description

0 Quality unknown (existing sync. network)
1 Reserved
2 Rec. G.811 (Traceable to PRS)
3 Reserved
4 SSU-A (Traceable to SSU type A, see G.812)
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 SSU-B (Traceable to SSU type B, see G.812)
9 Reserved
A Reserved
B Synchronous Equipment Timing Source (SETS)
C Reserved
D Reserved
E Reserved
F Do not use for synchronization

6.2.13 Bit Error Rate Test

This menu is used to do bit error rate testing. Press "T" from the "Controller Menu".

QX3440

TSI E1
loopback
E1 Devices
E1 BERT
AIS

The top section is for setup and second section is the result

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = B E RT Test === 10:05:22 03/25/2013

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e o ptions by TAB, or by typing

T e s t S lo t : A ( E1 )
T e s t P or t :
P a t te r n T yp e : 2 ex p 20- 1
S p l it Mo d e : S en d AI S
T e s t C ha n ne l : F ul l

CXR Page 100

6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

T e s t M ap : i 11 1 111 1 1 11 1 11 1 11 1 1111111111111i
T e s t D ir e ct : T o- L ine
U s e r P at t er n : 0 00 0 000 0
P e r io d (s e c) : 0 00 0 000
T e s t E na b le : E NA B LE

P a t te r n: 2e x p2 0 - 1 SY N C Elapsed Second: 2
E r r or Co u nt : 0 BER : 0.0
E r r or Se c on d s : 0 ESR : 0.0
SES : 0 SESR : 0.0
U n s yn c S e co n ds : 0
A v a il a bl e S e cs : 2

< < ES C K E Y : E X I T, LEF T AR R OW : R ESET ERROR, RIGHT ARROW : INJECT AN ERROR >>

Field Option Default Notes

Pattern Type 2exp20-1, 2exp15-1, 2exp20-1
2exp11-1, 2exp9-1, user def
Split Mode No, Send AIS Send AIS Send AIS: send AIS to the other side,
No: no sending AIS.
Test Channel Mapped, Full, Select Full Full : only available for E1 and T1 cards
Mapped: user should set up map first.
Select: when a channel is set as “1”,
this means this channel is used to do bit
error rate test.
Test Map
Test Direct To Line, To Mapped To Line
Period (sec) Set to 0: means text is permanent
Other value: Stop the test after time out
Test Enable Enable, Disable Disable

Note: This function is not available for these plug-in cards: Router, ATM Frame Relay, Dry Contact, FXS, FXO,
E&M, Data Bridge, Conference, and Magneto.

AIS: Alarm Indication Signal; SES: Severely Error Second

BER: Bit Error Rate, BER = Bit Error/ (Elapsed Second - SES) x test channel x 64,000
ESR: Error Second Ratio, ESR = Error Second/ Elapsed Second - SES

6.2.14 Alarm Cut Off

Press "A" to show the alarm cut off screen.

> > Us e T A B k ey t o s ele c t u n it , a n d ENTER key to clear alarm: ALL SLOTs

> > Cl e ar al a rm q ue u e o f AL L S L OT s - are you sure ? [Y/N]

>> Cut off alarm - are you sure (Y/N)?

6.2.15 Clear Alarm Queue

Press "X" to show the clear alarm queue screen.

=>> Clear Alarms (Y/N)?

CXR Page 101

6 Terminal Operation QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

6.2.16 Return to Default

Press "Y" to show the return to default screen.

>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]

6.2.17 Controller Reset

Press "Z" to show the system reset screen.

> > Se l ec t ? * R ed u nda n t P ri m ar y Both

> > Re s et – a r e y o u s ure ? [ Y /N ]

CXR Page 102

7 Appendix A: Link Backup Function QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

7 Appendix A: Link Backup Function

7.1 Introduction
The Link Backup Function of QX3440 only applies to single E1/T1, FOM in mini slot: A, B, C and D and
1FOMA in single slot (1 to 12). The Link backup function supports 1:1 and 1 + 1 protection. This occurs
when the system is set up so that a backup line (or lines in the case of 1: n) will be switched into service if
the working line fails. In such a case, it must be switched in at each end of the line.

POWER E1/T1(A) E1/T1(B) CPU-1 CPU-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1FOMA 1FOMA

E1/T1 E1/T1
C C
T T
R R
L L
E1/T1(C) E1/T1(D)

1 2

FOM FOM

The illustration below is the Link Backup Function Schema.

Link Backup Schema

1:1

Active Tributary
.
.
Backup .
.
Slot 12 .
.
.
.

DS0
Cross- Connect Tributary

Active
Backup

1+1

Active Tributary
.
.
Backup .
.
Slot 12 .
.
.
.

DS0
Cross- Connect Tributary

Active
Backup

CXR Page 103

7 Appendix A: Link Backup Function QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

7.2 Physical Requirement

The physical configuration of a Link Backup Function should consist of one QX3440 unit and at least 2
E1/T1 cards for mini slot or at least 2 FOM cards: FOM card for mini slot or 1FOMA for single slot.

7.3 Setup Procedure

To configure the Link Backup Function in the follow procedure:

1. Same configure on both link backup cards

2. Configure Link Backup Function
3. Configure the TSI Map (see TSI Map setup in chapter 6)

Configure Link Backup Function

 Command Path Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (G) Link Backup
Function
 Description This function is to setup the 1:1 or 1+1 protection for single
E1/T1, FOM cards in mini slots, and 1FOMA cards in single slot

1. From the System Setup (Backup) screen, choose to active/deactive for the backup function. Detail
fields are explaining in the following table.
2. When the setting finished, press ‘ESC’ to save the configuration. A prompt will ask, “Are you sure?
Y/N”. Press ‘Y’. You will automatically return to the Controller Setup screen.

Note: Both backup links shall have the same FRAME and CAS setting. Please return to controller menu
and go to unit setup for setting.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (Backup) === 15:14:36 08/18/2011

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Backup function : ON(1+1)

Mode : non-revertible

Link : Link-A Link-B Link-C Link-D Link-1 Link-2 Link-3 Link-4

Model : FE1 FE1 FT1 FT1 QuadT1 QuadE1 QuadE1
=========== ==============================================================
Backup Link : Link-B ------ Link-D ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
Backup Fun : OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Link Status : Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Force Switch:

Link : Link-5 Link-6 Link-7 Link-8 Link-9 Link10 Link11 Link12

Model : QuadE1 QuadE1 QuadE1 3E1
=========== ==============================================================
Backup Link : ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
Backup Fun : OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Link Status : Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Force Switch:

Note!! Please check both backup link have the same FRAME and CAS setting.
If protection type changed (ex: from 1:1 to 1+1), Please re-setup map!

Field Setting Options Default

Backup function ON, OFF, ON (1+1), ON (1:1) OFF
Mode non-revertible, revertible non-revertible
Backup Link Choose the backup link N/A

CXR Page 104

7 Appendix A: Link Backup Function QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Configure the TSI Map

 Command Path Main Menu > (S) System Setup > (C) TSI Map Setup
 Description This function is to do the TSI Map Setup. Select the desired slot
and port number for the mapping target. Next, select the
starting timeslot number (T.S) and the timeslot amount (T.S #),
and data or voice (d/v) for target. Also select the desired slot,
port and starting timeslot number (T.S) for the mapping source.
After configuration, select “Yes” for confirmation.
Note: More detail, please see TSI Map Setup in Chapter 6

CXR Page 105

8 Appendix B: Inband Management QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

8 Appendix B: Inband Management

8.1 Introduction
The advantage of Inband Management is that saves money because management is through the line itself and
a separate line is not needed for management functions. The disadvantage is that if you do anything to break
the management channel, you cannot get it back.

In Inband Management, the management function is inserted into the working line. Use the Router card,
management of a local, as well as one or more remote CXR products.

Detail info for Inband Protection Setup, please refer to (S) System Setup > (M) Inband Protection section.

The diagram below illustrates inband application:

The user can use router card to share one or more 64 Kbps time slot for SNMP management. Each 64 Kbps
time slot has enough bandwidth to manage four QX3440. Thus up to four QX3440 can share a single 64 Kbps
bandwidth for SNMP management.

Router card of the QX3440

allows Inband Management
through the network

QX3440 #1
E1
UNIT
Management
Network
Management Center W1 W2 W3
Router E1 E1
LAN

10/ 100 BaseT

One TS One TS

AM3440-S QX3440 #2
UNIT
E1
Management

Router E1 E1

One TS One TS

Data

Time slot Inband Management

QX3440 #3 QX3440 #4

Figure 8-1 Inband Management Diagram

CXR Page 106

8 Appendix B: Inband Management QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

8.2 Inband Management Setup Procedure

To configure the Inband Management in the follow procedure:

1. Select the inband slot in Controller Menu > (S) System Setup
2. Set Trap IP Address and its community in Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup >
(B) V1: Trap Setup
3. Set TSI Map in Controller Menu > (S) System Setup (C) TSI Map Setup.

Configure Inband Slot

Use arrow keys to move the cursor, and then set up the parameters in [Network] section. Then, choose slot D
port 4 or slot 12 port 4 for inband management. When done, press ESC to return to the Controller Setup Menu.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (SYSTEM) === 19:02:31 03/08/2013

[System]
Time/Date : 19:02:32 03/08/2013
Device Name : CXR QX3440

[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: R OU T ER
NI E N IP A dd r e ss S u bn e tM a sk Frame LB Timer
L A N : O FF 00 0 .0 0 0 .0 0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0.000 Ethernet
W A N : O FF 00 0 .0 0 0 .0 0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0.000 HDLC 00000001
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: LAN G a te w ay IP Addr: 000.000.000.000
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D N ot e : S lo t D port 4 can't use unframe mode!
[ C O NS O LE po r t]
B a u d R at e : 9 60 0
D a t a L en g th : 8 -B i ts
S t o p B it : 1 -B i t
P a r it y : N ON E
X O N _X O FF : X OF F

[ T S I m ap ] [Clock]
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : N(M u l ti c as t ) Clock Mode : SSM
I d l e S ig n al l in g : 1 0 10

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi ous menu >>

Inband Uses Slot: D Note: Slot D port 4 can't use unframe mode!

Inband Uses Slot: 12 Note: Slot 12 port 4 can't use unframe mode!

Note: To setup inband management, one 64K timeslot must be assigned for link to the controller (CTRL)
through the internal cross-connect (XC). In-band timeslot (64Kbps) must be selected in either Slot D/Port4 or
Slot 12/Port4.

Below are the plug-in cards that will be influenced due to the In-band timeslot limitation selected in either Slot D
or Slot 12:
Slot Plug-in Card
Slot D FOM, MQE1, RTA
Slot 12 RTB, 4GH, TDMoE, QE1/QT1, 1FOMA

Although the framing option for each of the 4 ports of a Mini Quad E1, Quad E1/T1, FOM or 1FOMA interface
card can be configured either "unframed" or "framed", provision for inband management imposes the following
limitation. When one of these is selected for inband management, the Port 4 in that Slot, D or 12, must be
configured to framed.

The RTA, RTB, 4GH and TDMoE card supports up to 32 timeslots in normal condition. Due to the timeslot
limitation, one 64K timeslot is already reserved in the port 4 of Slot D and Slot 12 for inband management.
When these cards are plugged in either Slot D or Slot 12, only a maximum of 31 timeslots can be set.

Configure Trap IP address and its community

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup > (B) V1: Trap Setup

CXR Page 107

8 Appendix B: Inband Management QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

CXR QX3440 === Trap and Community === 11:39:15 08/02/2011

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

Get Community : public______ Set Community : public

Trap IP 1 : 192.168.001.254 Community Name : public

Trap IP 2 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public
Trap IP 3 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public
Trap IP 4 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public
Trap IP 5 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public

Trap system IP : WAN

Alarm/Trap Type: Vendor-Spec

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Configure TSI Map

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup (C) TSI Map Setup.

Use arrow keys and the TAB key to set up the HDLC TSI map. You must select a time slot to use for inband
management. In the example below we decided to map Time Slot 1 of Port A to Time Slot 1 of the IB (In-band)
Port for this purpose. When you have completed your TSI map, press “ESC” to return to the Controller Setup
menu. Then press “D” from that menu to activate the new map.

CXR QX3440 = = = S ys tem Setup (MAP) === 16:47:28 08/02/2011

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
M A P N O : M AP _ 1
Ta r g et E1 N O N - CAS Source In - Band
T a r ge t PO / T S D SL / P O T S P O/ T S D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
S l o t : A == = = = = === = = == = = = == = = ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : 1 d IB 1 17 d 1 d A 1
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d
T . S .# : 0 1 5 d 21 d
C l e ar : N o 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d
S o u rc e 10 d 26 d
Slot : IB 11 d 27 d
Port : 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 1 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d
C o n fi r m? Y es 15 d 31 d
16 d

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o C on t ro l le r Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

CXR Page 108

8 Appendix B: Inband Management QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Use arrow keys to move the cursor, and then set up the parameters in [Network] section. Then, choose slot D
port 4 or slot 12 port 4 for inband management. When done, press ESC to return to the Controller Setup Menu.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = S y st e m S et up (SYSTEM) === 09:39:08 0 3/0 8/201 3

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
[ S y st e m]
T i m e/ D at e : 0 9: 3 9:0 8 08 / 18 / 20 1 0
D e v ic e N a me : C XR QX3 4 4 0

[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: R OU T ER
NI E N IP A dd r e ss S u bn e tM a sk Frame LB Timer
L A N : O N 01 0 .0 0 3 .0 2 3.0 1 0 2 5 5. 2 55 . 00 0.000 Ethernet
W A N : O FF 02 0 .0 0 1 .0 0 1.0 0 2 2 5 5. 2 55 . 00 0.000 HDLC 00000001
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: LAN G a te w ay IP Addr: 000.000.000.000
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D N ot e : S lo t D port 4 can't use unframe mode!

[ C O NS O LE po r t]
B a u d R at e : 3 84 0 0
D a t a L en g th : 8 -B i ts
S t o p B it : 1 -B i t
P a r it y : N ON E
X O N _X O FF : X OF F

[ T S I m ap ] [Clock]
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : 1(B i d ir e ct i on ) Clock Mode : Normal
I d l e S ig n al l in g : 1 0 10

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi ous menu >>

From the Controller Setup menu, and press “B” to access Trap and Community. Here, set up the trap IP
address and its community.

CXR QX3440 === Trap and Community === 10:59:31 12/08/2006

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort

Get Community : public______ Set Community : public

Trap IP 1 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public

Trap IP 2 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public
Trap IP 3 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public
Trap IP 4 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public
Trap IP 5 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public

Trap System IP:__________

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Back to the Controller Setup menu, and press “C” to access the System Setup (MAP) screen. Use arrow keys
and the TAB key to set up the HDLC TSI map. You must select a time slot to use for inband management. In
the example below we decided to map Time Slot 1 of Port A to Time Slot 1 of the HDLC Port for this purpose.
When you have completed your TSI map, press “ESC” to return to the Controller Setup menu. Then press “D”
from that menu to activate the new map.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = == Sy s te m S etup (MAP) === 14:16:07 09/09/2011

A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L OPTIONS
M A P N O : M AP _ 1
Ta r g et E1 N O N - CAS Source In - Band
T a r ge t PO / T S D SL / P O T S P O/ T S D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
S l o t : A == = = = = === = = == = = = == = = ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : 1 d IB 1 17 d 1 d A 1
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d
T . S .# : 0 1 5 d 21 d
C l e ar : N o 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d
S o u rc e 10 d 26 d
Slot : IB 11 d 27 d
Port : 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 1 13 d 29 d

CXR Page 109

8 Appendix B: Inband Management QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

14 d 30 d
C o n fi r m? Y es 15 d 31 d
16 d

< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o C on t ro l le r Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

CXR Page 110

9 Appendix C: QDS1 1:1 Protection QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

9 Appendix C: QDS1 1:1 Protection

9.1 Introduction

The QDS1 1:1 protection function only applies to Quad E1/T1, Mini Quad E1, and TDMoE/Quad E1/T1 cards.
Apply to QDS1 1:1 protection function; two plug-in cards must be inserted next to each other as a pair so that
one plug-in card can be used to protect the other.

NOTE:
· A pair of Quad E1/T1 and TDMoE/Quad E1/T1 cards should be installed in one of the following
slot groupings: [1&2], [3&4], [5&6], [7&8], [9&10] or [11&12]. The pair of cards should not be
installed in the following groupings: [2&3], [4&5], [6&7], [8&9] or [10&11]. Same rule for a pair of
Mini Quad E1 cards should be installed in the following slot groupings: [A&B], [C&D].
· Before removing any card from QX3440 shelf, please make sure its connecting cables are
removed from plug-in card first.
· This chapter introduces only 1:1 protection function for a pair of Quad E1/T1. For 1+1 protection
function of TDMoE and Quad E1/T1, please refer to the Appendix B of the TDMoE card User’s
Manual.

There are two types of protection available for the Quad E1/T1 and Mini Quad cards. They are Circuit
Protection and Line Protection. Circuit Protection requires the use of a CXR-VV Y-BOX. This Y-Box is
specifically designed to provide a 1:1 circuit protection function for the Quad E1/T1 and Mini Quad E1 cards of
the QX3440 shelf. Line Protection does not require the use of a Y-Box.

Each Quad E1/T1 or Mini Quad E1 card has four ports. The ports of one card protect the corresponding ports
of the other card. For example, Port 1 of the protection card protects Port 1 of the other card. Similarly, Port 2
of the protection card protects Port 2 of the other card, etc.

To configure the QDS1 1:1 Protection function in the follow procedure.

1. Select the QDS1 1:1 Protection function in Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (Q) QDS1 1:1
Protection
2. Set TSI Map in Controller Menu > (S) System Setup (C) TSI Map Setup

Note: You MUST set the protection first and then set the TSI map.

9.2 Setting up Circuit Protection

IMPORTANT: Lost of T1/E1 circuit will trigger switching that would cause the clock source to oscillate
between the working and the protection circuit card until the reaction from the remote side
stabilized. This might take a few minutes depending on the setup of the remote units and if
another Y-box is used in the remote side.
9.2.1 Connecting the Y-Box to the QX3440 Shelf
There are two Y-Box types available for the QX3440. One has BNC connectors and can handle up to 4 lines.
The other has RJ 48C connectors and can handle up to 16 lines. For every four lines you wish to protect you
must have one pair of Quad E1/T1 or one pair of mini Quad E1 plug-in cards in the QX3440.

NOTE: Cable connections between the RJ 48C connectors on the Y-Box and RJ48C connectors on
the QX3440 must be parallel, ie. Pin #1  Pin #1, Pin #2 Pin #2, Pin #4 # 4, and Pin #5 
# 5.

The following setup is using Quad E1 card for demonstration.

If you are using the BNC type Y BOX, use BNC cables to connect it to the QX3440 as shown in Figure 9-1,
below. For illustration purposes, only Port 1 is protected in this sample diagram. To protect other ports you
must connect them in a similar manner.

CXR Page 111

9 Appendix C: QDS1 1:1 Protection QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

POWER CPU-1 CPU-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

QUAD E1 QUAD E1
R R
C C x x
Port 4 Port 4
CXR T T Tx Tx
QX3440 R R
L L R
x
R
x
Port 3 Port 3
Tx Tx
1 2
R R
x x
Port 2 Port 2
Tx Tx

R R
CXR x x
QX3440 Port 1 Port 1
Tx Tx

CXR
Y-BOX
1 A-Tx Line-Tx B-Tx 1 2 A-Tx Line-Tx B-Tx 2 3 A-Tx Line-Tx B-Tx 3 4 A-Tx Line-Tx B-Tx 4

A-Rx Line-Rx B-Rx A-Rx Line-Rx B-Rx A-Rx Line-Rx B-Rx A-Rx Line-Rx B-Rx

Figure 9-1 Connection for QX3440 and Y-BOX with BNC connectors

If you are using the RJ48C type Y BOX, connect it to the QX3440 as shown in Figure 9-2 below. For illustration
purposes, only Port 9 is protected in this sample diagram. To protect other ports you must connect them in a
similar manner.

POWER CPU-1 CPU-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

QUAD E1 QUAD E1

C C
CXR T T
QX3440 R Port 4 Port 4
R
L L Port 3 Port 3

1 2

Port 2 Port 2

CXR Port 1 Port 1

QX3440

CXR A LINE 9 A LINE 10 A LINE 11 A LINE 12 A LINE 13 A LINE 14 A LINE 15 A LINE 16

B B B B B B B B
Y-BOX

A LINE 1
A LINE 2 B A LINE 3 B A LINE 4 B A LINE 5 B A LINE 6 B A LINE 7 B A LINE 8 B
B

Figure 9-2 Connection for QX3440 and Y-BOX with RJ48C connectors

CXR Page 112

9 Appendix C: QDS1 1:1 Protection QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

9.2.2 Quad E1 card Location

In our sample setup we installed a Quad E1 card in Slot #9. We will use it as a Master. It will be the working line.
We also installed a Quad E1 card in Slot #10. It will be used as a Slave and will perform the protection function.

9.2.3 Setting up a VT-100 Monitor

Use a DB9 cable to connect the front Console Port of the QX3440 to either COM Port 1 or COM Port 2 of the
PC you are using as a VT-100 monitor. It doesn’t matter which Com Port you connect to.

NOTE: Many newer PCs use USB Ports. If your computer has a USB port rather than COM ports you
will need to purchase a commercially available PC USB to DB9 conversion cable. These
cables come with software which, when loaded in a PC, will allow you to send keyboard
commands through the PC’s USB Port to the DB9 Console Port of the QX3440.

9.2.4 Step by Step Quad E1 Plug-in card Circuit Protection Setup

The sample screens below provide step by step instructions for setting up Quad E1 Circuit Protection. In our
sample setup we installed Quad E1 cards in slot #9 and slot #10. The card in slot #9 will be working slot, and
slot 10 will be standing by.

Go to Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (Q) QDS1 1:1 Protection, select Setup and press Enter.
The Setup menu is to setup the protection modes for each protection pair and ports.

C XR QX3440 === QDS1 1:1 Protection === 17:42:06 08/02/2011

>> Select ? *Setup Status

On the Setup Screen, there are four selection for the user to setup such as disable, circuit, line-non revertive
line-revertive, 1+1 non revertive, and 1+1 revertive. The sample below is to setup the port 1 of slot 9: 10 as
circuit protection. It means Slot 9 port 1 is protection working port and slot 10 port 1 as backup in Circuit
mode.

C XR QX3440 === QDS 1 1:1 Pr otec tion === 16:57:54 08/02/2011

AR R OW KEYS : C UR S OR MOVE, TAB : R OLL OP TI ONS
P r otec t Pa ir( Ma ster :Ba c kup) P or t 1 P or t 2 P or t 3 P or t 4
====================== ===== =========== =========== =========== ===========
S lot A :B ( F E1:F E1 ) - - --- - -- -- - -- -- -- -- - -- -- -- - -- -- -- - -- - -- -- - --
S lot C :D ( :F OM ) - -- --- - -- -- - -- -- -- -- - - - -- -- - -- -- - - - -- - -- -- - -
S lot 1 :2 ( Qua dE1: ) - - -- -- - -- -- - -- -- -- -- - - - -- -- - -- -- - - - -- - -- -- - -
S lot 3 :4 ( : ) - -- -- - -- -- - -- -- - -- -- -- -- - -- -- -- - - - -- -- - -- - --
S lot 5 :6 ( : ) - -- -- - -- -- - -- -- - -- -- -- -- - -- -- -- - - - -- -- - -- - --
S lot 7 :8 ( : ) - -- -- - -- -- - -- -- - -- -- -- -- - -- -- -- - - - -- -- - -- - --
S lot 9 :10 ( Qua dE1:Qua dE1) C I RC UI T LI NE - NONR EV 1+ 1 NONR EV DI S AB LE
S lot 11:12 ( : ) - -- -- - --- - - - -- - -- -- -- - - - -- -- -- - -- -- -- - -- - -- -

P r otec t ion Wor king P or t Por t 1 P or t 2 P or t 3 P or t 4

S lot A :B ( F E1:F E1 )
S lot C :D ( :F OM )
S lot 1 :2 ( Qua dE1: )
S lot 3 :4 ( : )
S lot 5 :6 ( : )
S lot 7 :8 ( : )
S lot 9 :10 ( Qua dE1:Qua dE 1) 9 - 1 9 -2 9 -3
S lot 11:12 ( : )
I f pr ote c tion type c ha nge d ( e x: f r om 1:1 to 1+ 1), P lea se re - se tup m a p!
>> C ha nge c onf igura tion ( Y/N)? ( Note :to sa ve , ple a se use V - c om ma nd)

CXR Page 113

9 Appendix C: QDS1 1:1 Protection QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Note:
Protection W orking Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
Slot 9 :10 (QuadE1:QuadE1) 9 -1 9 -2 9 -3
Definition: 9-1 means Slot 9 port 1, 9-2 means Slot 9 port 2, and etc.

Force Switch Configuration

The protection Setup must be set before the status setup.

Go to Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (Q) QDS1 1:1 Protection, select Status and press Enter.

The Status menu is to setup the ForceSwitch for each protection pair and ports.

C XR QX3440 === QDS1 1:1 Protection === 15:19:15 08/02/2011

>> Select ? Setup *Status

The Status menu, it is to setup the force switch function to the assigned port of assigned protect pair.

C XR QX3440 === QDS 1 1:1 Pr otec tion == = 17:00:00 08/02/2011

AR R OW KEYS : C UR S OR MOVE, TAB : R OLL OP TI ONS
P r otec t Pa ir( Ma ster :Ba c kup) P or t 1 P or t 2 P or t 3 P or t 4
====================== ===== =========== =========== =========== ===========
S lot A :B ( F E1:F E1 ) - - --- - -- -- - -- -- -- -- - -- -- -- - -- -- -- - -- - -- -- - --
S lot C :D ( :F OM ) - -- --- - -- -- - -- -- -- -- - - - -- -- - -- -- - - - -- - -- -- - -
S lot 1 :2 ( Qua dE1: ) - - -- -- - -- -- - -- -- -- -- - - - -- -- - -- -- - - - -- - -- -- - -
S lot 3 :4 ( : ) - -- -- - -- -- - -- -- - -- -- -- -- - -- -- -- - - - -- -- - -- - --
S lot 5 :6 ( : ) - -- -- - -- -- - -- -- - -- -- -- -- - -- -- -- - - - -- -- - -- - --
S lot 7 :8 ( : ) - -- -- - -- -- - -- -- - -- -- -- -- - -- -- -- - - - -- -- - -- - --
S lot 9 :10 ( Qua dE1:Qua dE1) For ce S witc h NO NO - - -- -- -- - --
S lot 11:12 ( : ) - -- -- - --- - - - -- - -- -- -- - - - -- -- -- - -- -- -- - -- - -- -

P r otec tion Wor king P or t Por t 1 P or t 2 P or t 3 P or t 4

S lot A :B ( F E1:F E1 )
S lot C :D ( :F OM )
S lot 1 :2 ( Qua dE1: )
S lot 3 :4 ( : )
S lot 5 :6 ( : )
S lot 7 :8 ( : )
S lot 9 :10 ( Qua dE1:Qua dE1) 9 - 1 9 -2 9 -3
S lot 11:12 ( : )

<< ES C ke y ignore a nd r e tur n, ENTER ke y a cce pt c ha nge >>

Function Option Default

ForceSwitch NO, ForceSwitch NO

Press Enter to accept change and key-in “Y” to change the configuration.
>> C ha nge c onf igura tion ( Y/N)? ( Note :to sa ve , ple a se use V - c om ma nd)

CXR Page 114

9 Appendix C: QDS1 1:1 Protection QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

9.3 Setting up Line Protection

Line protection is illustrated in the figure below. It does not require the use of a CXR-VV Y-BOX.

Quad E1 E1 Line Quad E1

Card Card

Quad E1 E1 Line Quad E1

Card Card

QX3440 QX3440

Figure 9-3 Line Protection for Quad E1 Card

9.3.1 Step by Step Quad E1 Card Line Protection Setup

The sample screens below provide step by step instructions for setting up Quad E1 Line Protection. In our
sample setup we installed Quad E1 cards in slot #9 and slot #10. The card in slot #9 will be working slot, and
slot 10 will be standing by.

Go to Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (Q) QDS1 1:1 Protection, select Setup and press Enter.

The Setup menu is to setup the protection modes for each protection pair and ports.

C XR QX3440 === QDS1 1:1 Protection === 17:42:06 08/02/2011

>> Select ? *Setup Status

On the Setup Screen, there are four selection for the user to setup such as disable, circuit, line-non revertive
line-revertive, 1+1 non revertive, and 1+1 revertive. The sample below is to setup the port 2 of slot 9: 10 as
LINE-NONREV protection and to setup the port 3 of slot 9: 10 as 1+1-NONREV protection. It means Slot 9
port 2 is protection working port and slot 10 port 2 as backup in LINE-Non Revertive mode and Slot 9 port 3 is
protection working port and slot 10 port 3 as backup in 1+1 Non Revertive mode.

CXR QX3440 === QDS1 1:1 Protection === 16:57:54 08/02/2011

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Protect Pair(Master:Backup) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
=========================== =========== =========== =========== ===========
Slot A :B ( FE1:FE1 ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot C :D ( :FOM ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 1 :2 (QuadE1: ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 3 :4 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 5 :6 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 7 :8 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 9 :10 (QuadE1:QuadE1) CIRCUIT LINE-NONREV 1+1 NONREV DISABLE
Slot 11:12 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------

Protection Working Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

Slot A :B ( FE1:FE1 )
Slot C :D ( :FOM )
Slot 1 :2 (QuadE1: )
Slot 3 :4 ( : )
Slot 5 :6 ( : )
Slot 7 :8 ( : )
Slot 9 :10 (QuadE1:QuadE1) 9 -1 9 -2 9 -3
Slot 11:12 ( : )

If protection type changed (ex: from 1:1 to 1+1), Please re-setup map!

CXR Page 115

9 Appendix C: QDS1 1:1 Protection QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

>> Change configuration (Y/N)? (Note:to save,please use V-command)

Force Switch Configuration

The protection Setup must be set before the status setup.

Go to Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (Q) QDS1 1:1 Protection, select Status and press Enter.

The Status menu is to setup the ForceSwitch for each protection pair and ports.

C XR QX3440 === QDS1 1:1 Protection === 15:19:15 08/02/2011

>> Select ? Setup *Status

The Status menu, it is to setup the force switch function to the assigned port of assigned protect pair.

CXR QX3440 === QDS1 1:1 Protection === 17:00:00 08/02/2011

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
Protect Pair(Master:Backup) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
=========================== =========== =========== =========== ===========
Slot A :B ( FE1:FE1 ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot C :D ( :FOM ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 1 :2 (QuadE1: ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 3 :4 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 5 :6 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 7 :8 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 9 :10 (QuadE1:QuadE1) ForceSwitch NO NO -----------
Slot 11:12 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------

Protection Working Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

Slot A :B ( FE1:FE1 )
Slot C :D ( :FOM )
Slot 1 :2 (QuadE1: )
Slot 3 :4 ( : )
Slot 5 :6 ( : )
Slot 7 :8 ( : )
Slot 9 :10 (QuadE1:QuadE1) 9 -1 9 -2 9 -3
Slot 11:12 ( : )

<< ESC key ignore and return, ENTER key accept change >>

Function Option Default

ForceSwitch NO, ForceSwitch NO

CXR Page 116

10 Appendix D: QX3440 Alarm Trap Information QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

10 Appendix D: QX3440 Alarm Trap Information

10.1 Trap definition
-- trap MIB

localTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE CXR-QX3440
VARIABLES { ccAlarmQueueString,
ccAlarmType,
ccAlarmModel,
ccAlarmSlot,
ccAlarmPort,
ccAlarmSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Local alarm trap"
::= 3

removeTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE CXR-QX3440
VARIABLES { ccAlarmQueueString,
ccAlarmType,
ccAlarmModel,
ccAlarmSlot,
ccAlarmPort,
ccAlarmSeverity }
DESCRIPTION
"Local alarm trap remove"
::= 9

CXR Page 117

10 Appendix D: QX3440 Alarm Trap Information QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

10.2 ccAlarmModel: Plug-in card model type

Number Plug-in card Plug-in card Type Description

Type
0 fe1 1-channel E1
1 ft1 1-channel T1
2 rs232-8 8-channel RS232 with X.50 subrate
3 oct-rt-b 8-LAN-port/ 64-WAN-port Router-B
4 v35 6-channel V.35
5 x50 5-channel RS232 with X.50 subrate
6 dtu-6 6-channel U
7 dtu-10 10-channel U
8 mdsl 3-channel MDSL
9 ls-optical 1-channel and 4-channel low speed optical (C37.94)
10 em 8-channel 2W/4W E&M
11 fxs 12-channel and 24-channel FXS
12 router 32 WAN port Router
13 fxo 12-channel and 24-channel FXO
14 afr-e1 1-channel E1 ATM/Frame Relay (discontinued)
15 afr-t1 1-channel T1 ATM/Frame Relay (discontinued)
16 magneto 12-channel Magneto
17 ocudp 8-channel OCU-DP
18 quad-e1 4-channel E1
19 quad-t1 4-channel T1
21 mdsl-a 3-channel MDSL-A
22 v35-a 6-channel V.35-A
23 gshdsl-4 4-channel G.SHDSL (1 pair) w/o line power
24 gshdsl-2 2-channel G.SHDSL (2 pairs) w/o line power
25 g703 8-channel G.703 card at 64 Kbps data rate
26 mquad-e1 Mini Quad E1
28 dry-contact 8-channel Dry Contact I/O
29 fom Fiber optical interface
30 router-a 64 WAN port Router-A
32 controller Controller
37 conference Conference card
38 octDte 8-channel DTEA
39 tri-e1 3-channel E1
40 tri-t1 3-channel T1 (future option)
42 sdte Single port DTE for 4200
43 tdmoe TDMoE
44 8DBRA 8-channel Data Bridge Card
46 V.110 6-channel V.110
91 x21-a 6-channel X.21-A
92 v36-a 6-channel V.36-A
93 rs422-a 6-channel RS422-A
94 eia530-rs449-a 6-channel EIA530-A/RS449-A
99 unknown Unknown plug-in card type

CXR Page 118

10 Appendix D: QX3440 Alarm Trap Information QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

10.3 ccAlarmSlot: Slot index

Number Slot Number

1 Slot A
2 Slot B
3 Slot C
4 Slot D
5 Slot 1
6 Slot 2
7 Slot 3
8 Slot 4
9 Slot 5
10 Slot 6
11 Slot 7
12 Slot 8
13 Slot 9
14 Slot 10
15 Slot 11
16 Slot 12

10.4 ccAlarmPort: Port index

Number Port Number

0 Port 1
1 Port 2
2 Port 3
3 Port 4
4 Port 5
5 Port 6
6 Port 7
7 Port 8
8 Port 9
9 Port 10
10 Port 11
11 Port 12

10.5 ccAlarmType < 20: Controller alarm

Number Alarm type

0 alarm-cut-off
1 slot-no-work
2 slot-start
3 slot-clock-loss
4 primary-start
5 redundant-loss
6 backup-switch
7 power-fail
8 redundant-chksum-error
9 fan-fail
10 map-switch
11 link-protection
12 redundant-insert
13 redundant-unsync
14 redundant-to-primary
15 plug-in card-type-mismatch

CXR Page 119

10 Appendix D: QX3440 Alarm Trap Information QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Number Alarm type

16 link-id-mismatch
17 power-consumption-alarm
18 ssm clock switch
19 management alarm
103 master-clock-loss
104 second-clock-loss
105 redundant-ext-clock-loss
106 qe1t1-1for1-switch
111 ds0-sncp-switch
121 sntp-alarm

10.6 ccAlarmType: Unit alarm

ccAlarmType for unit alarm has two formats: Vendor Spec and Assigned. Vendor Spec is the original format
that displays only the alarm number. Assigned is the new format that displays the alarm type description.
Select the format in V1: Trap Setup ( Command Path: Main Menu> (S) System Setup >(S)SNMP Setup >(B)V1:
Trap Setup). The alarm type on the SNMP screen will show in the format that you choose.

Note: E&M, FXO, FXS and TS card do not have alarms, so there is no alarm type to these cards. For RS232
and EIA530, please refer to DTE-A alarm type table.

1. E1 Card
Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
21 e1-rai(201) RAI
22 e1-ais(202) AIS
23 e1-los(203) LOS
24 e1-lof(204) LOF
25 e1-bpv(205) BPV
26 e1-es (206) ES
27 e1-uas(207) UAS
28 e1-css(208) CSS

2. T1 Card
Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
21 t1-yel(221) YEL
22 t1-ais(222) AIS
23 t1-los(223) LOS
24 t1-lof(224) LOF
25 t1-bpv(225) BPV
26 t1-es (226) ES
27 t1-uas(227) UAS
28 t1-css(228) CSS

3. DTE-A (V.35/X.21/V.36/..) / 5RS232 (5X50) Card

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 dte-unsync(501) UNSYNC

4. 8RS232 (8X50) Card

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 dte-ext-clk-loss(511) EXT-CLK-LOSS
21 dte-rts-loss(512) RTS-LOSS
22 dte-remote-alarm(513) REMOTE-ALARM

CXR Page 120

10 Appendix D: QX3440 Alarm Trap Information QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

5. V.110 Card
Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 dte-ext-clk-loss(511) EXT-CLK-LOSS
21 dte-rts-loss(512) RTS-LOSS
22 dte-remote-alarm(513) REMOTE-ALARM

6. DTU 6/10 Card

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 dtu-unsync(503) UNSYNC

7. MDSL Card
Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 mdsl-master-los(361) LOS,MASTER-LOOP
21 mdsl-slave-los(362) LOS,SLAVE-LOOP
22 mdsl-master-es-15m(363) ES15M,MASTER-LOOP
23 mdsl-slave-es-15m(364) ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP
24 mdsl-master-ses-15m(36 SES15M,MASTER-LOOP
5)
25 mdsl-slave-ses-15m(366) SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP
26 mdsl-master-es-24h(367) ES24H,MASTER-LOOP
27 mdsl-slave-es-24h(368) ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP
28 mdsl-master-ses-24h(369 SES24H,MASTER-LOOP
)
29 mdsl-slave-ses-24h(370) SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP
30 mdsl-mclk-loss(371) MCLK LOSS
31 mdsl-sealing-current(372) SEALING CURRENT

8. ATM E1/T1 Card

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
21 e1-rai(201) RAI" or “YEL
t1-yel(221)
22 e1-ais(202) AIS
t1-ais(222)
23 e1-los(203) LOS
t1-los(223)
24 e1-lof(204) LOF
t1-lof(224)
25 e1-bpv(205) BPV
t1-bpv(225)
26 e1-es (206) ES
t1-es (226)
27 e1-uas(207) UAS
t1-uas(227)
28 e1-css(208) CSS
t1-css(228)
29 atm-los(261) ATM LOS
30 atm-ais(262) ATM AIS
31 atm-rdi(263) ATM RDI
32 atm-loc(264) ATM LOC
33 fr-lkd (265) FR LKD

9. QE1/Mini QE1
Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 e1-rai(201) RAI
21 e1-ais(202) AIS
22 e1-los(203) LOS
23 e1-lof(204) LOF
Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
24 e1-bpv(205) BPV

CXR Page 121

10 Appendix D: QX3440 Alarm Trap Information QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

25 e1-es (206) ES
26 e1-uas(207) UAS
27 e1-css(208) CSS
28 TCPA(210) TCPA

10. QT1 Card

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 t1-yel(221) YEL
21 t1-ais(222) AIS
22 t1-los(223) LOS
23 t1-lof(224) LOF
24 t1-bpv(225) BPV
25 t1-es (226) ES
26 t1-uas(227) UAS
27 t1-css(228) CSS
28 TCPA(230) TCPA

11. 3E1
Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 e1-rai(201) RAI
21 e1-ais(202) AIS
22 e1-los(203) LOS
23 e1-lof(204) LOF
24 e1-bpv(205) BPV
25 e1-es (206) ES
26 e1-uas(207) UAS
27 e1-css(208) CSS
28 ais-ins(209) AIS-INSERT

12. G.703 Card

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 g703-los(541) LOS

13. G.shdsl Card

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 gshdsl-htuc-los-loop1(301) LOS,MASTER-LOOP1
21 gshdsl-htuc-los-loop2(302) LOS,MASTER-LOOP2
22 gshdsl-htur-los-loop1(303) LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1
23 gshdsl-htur-los-loop2(304) LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2
24 gshdsl-htuc-e1t1-los-lof(305) LOS/LOF,MASTER-E1
25 gshdsl-htur-e1t1-los-lof(306) LOS/LOF,SLAVE-E1
26 gshdsl-htuc-es-15m-loop1(307) ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1
27 gshdsl-htuc-es-15m-loop2(308) ES15M,MASTER-LOOP2
28 gshdsl-htur-es-15m-loop1(309) ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1
29 gshdsl-htur-es-15m-loop2(310) ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2
30 gshdsl-htuc-e1t1-es-15m(311) ES15M,MASTER-E1
31 gshdsl-htur-e1t1-es-15m(312) ES15M,SLAVE-E1
32 gshdsl-htuc-ses-15m-loop1(313) SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1
33 gshdsl-htuc-ses-15m-loop2(314) SES15M,MASTER-LOOP2
34 gshdsl-htur-ses-15m-loop1(315) SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1
35 gshdsl-htur-ses-15m-loop2(316) SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2
36 gshdsl-htuc-e1t1-ses-15m(317) SES15M,MASTER-E1
37 gshdsl-htur-e1t1-ses-15m(318) SES15M,SLAVE-E1
38 gshdsl-htuc-es-24h-loop1(319) ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1
39 gshdsl-htuc-es-24h-loop2(320) ES24H,MASTER-LOOP2
40 gshdsl-htur-es-24h-loop1(321) ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1
41 gshdsl-htur-es-24h-loop2(322) ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2
42 gshdsl-htuc-e1t1-es-24h(323) ES24H,MASTER-E1

CXR Page 122

 10 Appendix D: QX3440 Alarm Trap Information QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type

43 gshdsl-htur-e1t1-es-24h(324) ES24H,SLAVE-E1
44 gshdsl-htuc-ses-24h-loop1(325) SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1
45 gshdsl-htuc-ses-24h-loop2(326) SES24H,MASTER-LOOP2
46 gshdsl-htur-ses-24h-loop1(327) SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1
47 gshdsl-htur-ses-24h-loop2(328) SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2
48 gshdsl-htuc-e1t1-ses-24h(329) SES24H,MASTER-E1
49 gshdsl-htur-e1t1-ses-24h(330) SES24H,SLAVE-E1
50 gshdsl-sealing-current(331) SEALING CURRENT
51 gshdsl-mclk-loss(332) MCLK LOSS
52 gshdsl-htuc-dte-rts(333) RTS,MASTER-DTE
53 gshdsl-htur-dte-rts(334) RTS,SLAVE-DTE
54 gshdsl-htuc-dte-extclk(335) EXTCLK,MASTER-DTE
55 gshdsl-htur-dte-extclk(336) EXTCLK,SLAVE-DTE
56 gshdsl-dying-gasp-alarm(337) DYING GASP ALARM
57 gshdsl-loop-attenu-alarm(338) LOOP ATTENU ALARM
58 gshdsl-low-noise-margin(339) LOW NOISE MARGIN
59 gshdsl-htur-link-down(340) HTUR LINK DOWN

14. FOM Card/1FOM-A Card

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 fom-opt-local-lof (601) LOF,LOCAL-OPTICAL
21 fom-opt-local-los (602) LOS,LOCAL-OPTICAL
22 fom-opt-local-rai (603) RAI,LOCAL-OPTICAL
23 fom-opt-remote-lof(604) LOF,REMOTE-OPTICAL
24 fom-opt-remote-los(605) LOS,REMOTE-OPTICAL
25 fom-opt-local-es (606) ES, LOCAL-OPTICAL
26 fom-opt-local-ses (607) SES, LOCAL-OPTICAL
27 fom-opt-local-uas (608) UAS, LOCAL-OPTICAL
36 fom-e1-local-lof (617) LOF, LOCAL-E1
37 fom-e1-remote-lof (618) LOF, REMOTE-E1
38 fom-e1-local-es (619) ES, LOCAL-E1
39 fom-e1-local-ses (620) SES, LOCAL-E1
40 fom-e1-local-uas (621) UAS, LOCAL-E1
41 fom-e1-local-bpv (622) BPV, LOCAL-E1

15. C37.94 Card

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 lso-los(441) LOS
21 lso-yel(442) YEL
22 lso-es (443) ES
23 lso-ses(444) SES
24 lso-uas(445) UAS

16. Dry Contact/ Dry Contact-B

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 dc-n1-p1(701) Input port 1, pair 1
21 dc-n1-p2(702 Input port 1, pair 2
22 dc-n1-p3(703) Input port 1, pair 3
23 dc-n1-p4(704) Input port 1, pair 4
24 dc-n2-p1(705) Input port 2, pair 1
25 dc-n2-p2(706) Input port 2, pair 2
26 dc-n2-p3(707) Input port 2, pair 3
27 dc-n2-p4(708) Input port 2, pair 4

CXR Page 123

 10 Appendix D: QX3440 Alarm Trap Information QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

17. OCU DP Card

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 ocudp-los(461) LOS
21 ocudp-oos(462) OOS
24 ocudp-es (465) ES
25 ocudp-ses(466) SES
26 ocudp-uas(467) UAS
27 ocudp-loopbk(468) LOOPBK
28 ocudp-test(469) TEST
29 ocudp-lof(470) LOF

18. RT Card
Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 lan1-link-down(401) LAN1
21 lan2-link-down(402) LAN2

19. RT-A Card

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 lan1-link-down(401) LAN1-LINK DOWN
21 lan2-link-down(402) LAN2-LINK DOWN

20. RT-B Card

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 lan1-link-down(401) LAN1-LINK DOWN
21 lan2-link-down(402) LAN2-LINK DOWN
22 lan3-link-down(403) LAN3-LINK DOWN
23 lan4-link-down(404) LAN4-LINK DOWN
24 lan5-link-down(405) LAN5-LINK DOWN
25 lan6-link-down(406) LAN6-LINK DOWN
26 lan7-link-down(407) LAN7-LINK DOWN
27 lan8-link-down(408) LAN8-LINK DOWN

21. TDMoE Card

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 tdmoe-arp-lost(1001) ARP_LOST
21 tdmoe-rx-lost(1002) RX_LOST
22 tdmoe-cell-lost(1003) CELL_LOST
23 tdmoe-jit-buf-underrun(1004) UNDERRUN
24 tdmoe-jit-buf-overrun(1005) OVERRUN
25 tdmoe-eth1-link-down(1006) ETH1_LINK_DOWN
26 tdmoe-eth2-link-down(1007) ETH2_LINK_DOWN
27 tdmoe-eth3-link-down(1008) ETH3_LINK_DOWN
28 tdmoe-eth4-link-down(1009) ETH4_LINK_DOWN

22. 8UDTEA Card

Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
20 rts-loss(521) RTS_ LOSS

CXR Page 124

10 Appendix D: QX3440 Alarm Trap Information QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

10.7 Alarm Setup Indication

Access (M) System Alarm Setup from the VT100 main menu to activate the alarm actions listed below.

* for alarm action: ENABLE

** for alarm action: EN_NEW
*** only for firmware version V8.06.01 and up

Model = 32 (controller) for all CTRL alarm. (Please refer to 10.2 Alarm Model for model type)
Slot: N=A~D, 1~12, 0(none), 99=external. R=103 (ctrl1-external), 104 (ctrl2-external).
Port: M=1~12, 254 (none)

Alarm Setup Alarm Action for (type/slot/port) Type Slot Port Notes

Alarm Cut Off Alarm cut off 0 0 254 No relay

Slot Inactive Slot N inactive 1 N 254 A1

Slot Start-up Slot N startup 2 N 254 C1

Slot N (P M) clock loss* N M
3
External clock loss * 99 254
Master Clock (Slot N Pm) Loss** 103 N M
Clock Loss Second Clock (Slot N Pm) Loss** 104 N M
A4/C4
CTRL1/2 EXT clock loss** 105 R 254
CTRL1/2 redundant EXT clock loss*** 105 R 254
SSM switch to Slot N (P M) N M
18
SSM switch to Internal 0 254
Link switch to 6 254 Backup
Link switch to* 6 M QE1 1:1
Link switch to** 106 M QE1 1:1
Link Switch N
Protection on 11 M PDH SPRing
DS0-SNCP switch to* 11 0iiijjjj(b) i=port, j=ts
DS0-SNCP switch to** 111 0iiijjjj(b) i=port, j=ts
Map Switch Map switch to 10 0 M m=1-4
Power fail alarm 7
A3/C3
Power Alarm Fan fail alarm 9 0 254
Power consumption 17
Card type mismatch 15 254
Type Mismatch N
Link ID mismatch 16 M
Primary start 4
Redundant loss 5 A2
Redundant checksum error 8
Dual-CPU Alarm 0 254
Redundant insert 12 C2
Redundant unsync 13
Redundant to primary 14
Log-in/out 19 P
Management Alarm** 0 No relay
SNTP server X fail/ok*** 121 X

Note: An/Cn: Cn will clear alarm relay for An.

CXR Page 125

11 Appendix E: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

11 Appendix E: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring

11.1 Overview
A PDH Shared Protection Ring can be an ideal solution for voice and data transmission networks, in that, if any
one E1 connection is broken, the voice and data communication system will still function. This protection is
made possible by mapping a loopback to where the channel came from.

In a PDH Shared Protection Ring, each line is split in two directions. The working line (outside line in the
diagram below) travels in a counter-clockwise direction. The protection line (inside line) travels in a clockwise
direction.

While the is no theoretical limit to the number of nodes in a ring, each node needs 2-3 seconds to stabilize SSM
clock switching after a break occurs. In our sample diagram below we have used five nodes.

Note: ULSR ring does not support E1 unframed mode. Users must use E1 frame mode to set up a ULSR ring.

E1
HDLC Router
Port A
TS31
4E1
TS1-30 TS1-30
Management PC
MASTER HDLC Inband
Inband Mamnagement is set up by
assigning1 DS0 (64K) for inband
Port B Port C
management purposes on the TSl
4E1 4E1 timeslot map of each QX3440 unit.
TS1-31

Clk: A/Internal TS1-31 TS1-31

TS1-2 HDLC
Port C TS3-4
Port A Port B Port D
TS27
4E1 4E1 4E1 4E1
TS30

TS5-31 TS1-31 TS1-31

Clk: A/B Clk: A/B
SLAVE #1
TS1-12 SLAVE #4
TS17-31
TS27
Port D Port B Port A TS15-16
Port C
4E1 HDLC
TS30 4E1 4E1 TS13-14 4E1

TS5-6 HDLC
Port C TS7-8
Port A Port B TS28 Port D
4E1 4E1 4E1 4E1
TS29
TS1-4 TS1-31
TS1-31
TS9-31
Clk: A/B Clk: A/B TS1-8 SLAVE #3
SLAVE #2 TS13-31
TS28
Port D Port B Port A TS11-12 Port C
4E1 HDLC
TS29 4E1 4E1 TS9-10 4E1

CXR Page 126

11 Appendix E: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

11.2 Setup Instructions

1. Nodes

Set up four nodes, each of which consists of a QX3440 device equipped with four Quad E1 cards (or
alternatively, four Mini-quad E1 cards or four E1 Fiber Optical Module). Each of these nodes will be referred to
as Slaves.

2. Master Unit

Set up a Master unit, which consists of a QX3440 device equipped with three Quad E1 cards (or alternatively,
three Mini-quad E1 cards or three E1 FOM (Fiber Optical Module) cards, and a single Router card.

3. VT-100

Each QX3440 can be set up individually using a VT-100 monitor.

4. Clocks

The clocks must be set up on each of the QX3440 units. If you have no SSM source at the MASTER unit, set
the clock for this unit at NORMAL. SLAVE units must have their clock set at SSM.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (CLOCK-Normal Mode) ===15:16:51 03/24/2006

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Master_Clk Source : INTERNAL

Second_Clk Source : INTERNAL
Current Clock : MASTER_CLK
Clk_Recover_Mode : MANUAL
Clock Status : NORMAL
Ext. Clock Type : E1

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The clocks on the SLAVE units will be set up as shown in the screen below.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (CLOCK-SSM Mode) === 15:19:39 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

First Clock Source : SLOT_1 P1

Second Clock Source : SLOT_1 P2
Third Clock Source : NONE
Current Clock : FIRST_CLK
Clock Status : NORMAL

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

5. FDL (Facilities Data Link)

On the Port System Setup screen, set the FDL must be set at SSM for all
ports in the ring (ie. Slave unit ports and Master unit ports). This setting is highlighted
on the sample setup screen below.

SLOT A MQuad-E1 PORT 1 === Port System Setup === 15:24:25 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

CXR Page 127

11 Appendix E: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL = SSM
Sa_bit = Sa4
IDLE = D5
Protected = DISABLE
Master = SLAVE
INTF = 120 Ohm

Warning!! If you need to change FRAME and CAS.

Please clear TSI MAP(MAP1~4) of this port.
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

6. TSI Function

The TSI function for all the QX3440 devices must be set at 1: N (Multicast).
This setting is highlighted on the sample setup screen below.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (SYSTEM) === 09:39:08 03/08/2013

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
[System]
Time/Date : 09:39:08 03/08/2013
Device Name : CXR QX3440

[Network]
Mode:ROUTER
NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer
LAN :ON 010.003.023.010 255.255.000.000 Ethernet
WAN :ON 020.001.001.002 255.255.000.000 HDLC 00000001
Gateway Interface: LAN Gateway IPAddr: 000.000.000.000
Inband Uses Slot: D (or 12) Note: Slot D (or 12) port 4 can't use unframe mode!

[CONSOLE port]
Baud Rate : 38400
Data Length : 8-Bits
Stop Bit : 1-Bit
Parity : NONE
XON_XOFF : XOFF

[TSI map] [Clock]

TSI Function : 1:N(Multicast) Clock Mode : Normal
Idle Signalling: 1010

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

7. Map Setup

You must do your mapping for the Master Unit. This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. The source port
is Slot1, Port 3 and the target port is Slot1, port 1.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target Quad-E1 NON-CAS Source Quad-E1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P1 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17 3 1 d 1 2 1 3 17 d 1 2 17
T.S. : 01 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18 3 2 d 1 2 2 3 18 d 1 2 18
1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19 3 3 d 1 2 3 3 19 d 1 2 19
1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20 3 4 d 1 2 4 3 20 d 1 2 20
T.S.# : 31 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21 3 5 d 1 2 5 3 21 d 1 2 21
Clear : No 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22 3 6 d 1 2 6 3 22 d 1 2 22
d/v : d 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23 3 7 d 1 2 7 3 23 d 1 2 23
1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24 3 8 d 1 2 8 3 24 d 1 2 24
1 9 d 1 3 9 1 25 d 1 3 25 3 9 d 1 2 9 3 25 d 1 2 25

CXR Page 128

11 Appendix E: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Source 1 10 d 1 3 10 1 26 d 1 3 26 3 10 d 1 2 10 3 26 d 1 2 26
Slot : 1 1 11 d 1 3 11 1 27 d 1 3 27 3 11 d 1 2 11 3 27 d 1 2 27
Port : P3 1 12 d 1 3 12 1 28 d 1 3 28 3 12 d 1 2 12 3 28 d 1 2 28
T.S. : 01 1 13 d 1 3 13 1 29 d 1 3 29 3 13 d 1 2 13 3 29 d 1 2 29
1 14 d 1 3 14 1 30 d 1 3 30 3 14 d 1 2 14 3 30 d 1 2 30
Confirm?Yes 1 15 d 1 3 15 1 31 d 1 3 31 3 15 d 1 2 15 3 31 d 1 2 31
1 16 d 1 3 16 3 16 d 1 2 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

This is a sample TSI map for the master unit. The source port is slot 1port 1 and the target port is slot 1 port 2.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target Quad-E1 NON-CAS Source Quad-E1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P2 2 1 d 1 1 1 2 17 d 1 1 17 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17
T.S. : 01 2 2 d 1 1 2 2 18 d 1 1 18 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18
2 3 d 1 1 3 2 19 d 1 1 19 1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19
2 4 d 1 1 4 2 20 d 1 1 20 1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20
T.S.# : 30 2 5 d 1 1 5 2 21 d 1 1 21 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21
Clear : No 2 6 d 1 1 6 2 22 d 1 1 22 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22
d/v : d 2 7 d 1 1 7 2 23 d 1 1 23 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23
2 8 d 1 1 8 2 24 d 1 1 24 1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24
2 9 d 1 1 9 2 25 d 1 1 25 1 9 d 1 3 9 1 25 d 1 3 25
Source 2 10 d 1 1 10 2 26 d 1 1 26 1 10 d 1 3 10 1 26 d 1 3 26
Slot : 1 2 11 d 1 1 11 2 27 d 1 1 27 1 11 d 1 3 11 1 27 d 1 3 27
Port : P1 2 12 d 1 1 12 2 28 d 1 1 28 1 12 d 1 3 12 1 28 d 1 3 28
T.S. : 01 2 13 d 1 1 13 2 29 d 1 1 29 1 13 d 1 3 13 1 29 d 1 3 29
2 14 d 1 1 14 2 30 d 1 1 30 1 14 d 1 3 14 1 30 d 1 3 30
Confirm?Yes 2 15 d 1 1 15 2 31 d IB 1 1 15 d 1 3 15 1 31 d 1 3 31
2 16 d 1 1 16 1 16 d 1 3 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. The source port is slot 1 port 2 and the target port is slot 1 port 3.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target Quad-E1 NON-CAS Source Quad-E1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P3 3 1 d 1 2 1 3 17 d 1 2 17 2 1 d 1 1 1 2 17 d 1 1 17
T.S. : 01 3 2 d 1 2 2 3 18 d 1 2 18 2 2 d 1 1 2 2 18 d 1 1 18
3 3 d 1 2 3 3 19 d 1 2 19 2 3 d 1 1 3 2 19 d 1 1 19
3 4 d 1 2 4 3 20 d 1 2 20 2 4 d 1 1 4 2 20 d 1 1 20
T.S.# : 31 3 5 d 1 2 5 3 21 d 1 2 21 2 5 d 1 1 5 2 21 d 1 1 21
Clear : No 3 6 d 1 2 6 3 22 d 1 2 22 2 6 d 1 1 6 2 22 d 1 1 22
d/v : d 3 7 d 1 2 7 3 23 d 1 2 23 2 7 d 1 1 7 2 23 d 1 1 23
3 8 d 1 2 8 3 24 d 1 2 24 2 8 d 1 1 8 2 24 d 1 1 24
3 9 d 1 2 9 3 25 d 1 2 25 2 9 d 1 1 9 2 25 d 1 1 25
Source 3 10 d 1 2 10 3 26 d 1 2 26 2 10 d 1 1 10 2 26 d 1 1 26
Slot : 1 3 11 d 1 2 11 3 27 d 1 2 27 2 11 d 1 1 11 2 27 d 1 1 27
Port : P2 3 12 d 1 2 12 3 28 d 1 2 28 2 12 d 1 1 12 2 28 d 1 1 28
T.S. : 01 3 13 d 1 2 13 3 29 d 1 2 29 2 13 d 1 1 13 2 29 d 1 1 29
3 14 d 1 2 14 3 30 d 1 2 30 2 14 d 1 1 14 2 30 d 1 1 30
Confirm?Yes 3 15 d 1 2 15 3 31 d 1 2 31 2 15 d 1 1 15 2 31 d IB 1
3 16 d 1 2 16 2 16 d 1 1 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. Note that this map sets up the HDLC Inband Management
mapping.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target In-Band Source Quad-E1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : IB ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========

CXR Page 129

11 Appendix E: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Port : 1 d 1 1 31 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17
T.S. : 01 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18
1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19
1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20
T.S.# : 01 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21
Clear : No 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22
d/v : d 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23
1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24
1 9 d 1 3 9 1 25 d 1 3 25
Source 1 10 d 1 3 10 1 26 d 1 3 26
Slot : 1 1 11 d 1 3 11 1 27 d 1 3 27
Port : P1 1 12 d 1 3 12 1 28 d 1 3 28
T.S. : 31 1 13 d 1 3 13 1 29 d 1 3 29
1 14 d 1 3 14 1 30 d 1 3 30
Confirm?Yes 1 15 d 1 3 15 1 31 d 1 3 31
1 16 d 1 3 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

8. Ring Enabling

From the Master Unit QX3440 Controller Setup screen press R to set up PDH Ring Protection.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = C on t ro l ler Setup === 10:37:14 03/08/2013

[S Y ST E M] [MAP]
A - > S ys t e m C - > TSI Map Setup
S - > S NM P Se t up D - > Select a New TSI Map
B - > P as s w or d E - > Copy a TSI Map to Another
H - > T EL N E T/ S SH S e tu p F - > Clear a TSI Map
I - > U ni t In i t/C l e ar

[P R OT E CT I O N] [OTHER]
G - > L in k Ba c kup F un c ti o n L - > Command Line
Q - > Q DS 1 1: 1 Pr o t ec t io n N - > SNTP Se tup
K - > D S0 - S NC P Se t u p U - > SYSLOG Setup
R - > P DH R in g Pr o t ec t io n P - > Power Setup
T - > P DH R in g Di a g no s ti c V - > RADIUS Setup
M - > I nb a n d P rot e c ti o n

<< Pr e ss ES C ke y to re tur n to M a in M e nu or e nte r a c omm a nd >>

The PDH Ring Protection screen will appear.

Under normal operating conditions, Alarm Filtering happens first due to alarm the system then switches to "ring
protection" mode. After that Switching Interval determines when to switch back to normal.

CXR QX3440 === PDH Ring Protection === 18:10:53 02/16/2012

ARROW KEYS: Cursor move; Change options by TAB, or by typing
PDH Ring Protection: ENABLE Ring Station : SLAVE
Switching Interval : 05 Alarm Filtering: 030
Slot(Model) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
============== ======= ======= ======= =======
C ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
D ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
1 (Quad E1 ) ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE
2 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
3 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
4 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
5 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
6 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
7 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
8 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
9 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
10 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
11 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------

CXR Page 130

11 Appendix E: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

12 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

You must now repeat steps 7 and 8 for each of the QX3440 Slave units in order to complete the PDH Shared
Protection Ring setup procedure.

CXR Page 131

12 Appendix F: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring (T1) QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

12 Appendix F: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring (T1)

12.1 Overview

A PDH Shared Protection Ring can be an ideal solution for voice and data transmission networks, in that, if any
one T1 connection is broken, the voice and data communication system will still function. This protection is
made possible by mapping a loopback to where the channel came from.

In a PDH Shared Protection Ring, each line is split in two directions. The working line (outside line in the
diagram below) travels in a counter-clockwise direction. The protection line (inside line) travels in a clockwise
direction.

While the is no theoretical limit to the number of nodes in a ring, each node needs 2-3 seconds to stabilize SSM
clock switching after a break occurs. In our sample diagram below we have used five nodes.

T1
HDLC Router
Port A
TS24
4T1
TS1-23 TS1-23
Management PC
MASTER HDLC Inband
Inband Mamnagement is set up by
assigning1 DS0 (64K) for inband
Port B Port C
management purposes on the TSl
4T1 4T1 timeslot map of each QX3440 unit.
TS1-24

Clk: A/Internal

TS1-2 HDLC
Port C TS3-4
Port A Port B Port D
TS20
4T1 4T1 4T1 4T1

TS5-24 TS1-24 TS1-24

SLAVE Clk: A/B Clk: A/B TS1-12

SLAVE
#1 TS17-24 #4
Port D Port B Port A TS15-16 Port C
4T1 HDLC
TS23 4T1 4T1 TS13-14 4T1

TS5-6 HDLC
Port C TS7-8
Port A Port B TS21 Port D
4T1 4T1 4T1 4T1
TS1-4 TS1-24
TS1-24
TS9-24
Clk: A/B Clk: A/B SLAVE
SLAVE TS1-8
TS13-24 #3
#2
Port D Port B Port A TS11-12 Port C
4T1 HDLC
TS22 4T1 4T1 TS9-10 4T1

CXR Page 132

12 Appendix F: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring (T1) QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

12.2 Setup Instructions

1. Nodes

Set up four nodes, each of which consists of a QX3440 device equipped with four Quad T1 cards. Each of
these nodes will be referred to as Slaves.

2. Master Unit

Set up a Master unit, which consists of a QX3440 device equipped with three Quad T1 cards, and a single
Router card.

3. VT-100

Each QX3440 can be set up individually using a VT-100 monitor.

4. Clocks

The clocks must be set up on each of the QX3440 units. If you have no SSM source at the MASTER unit, set
the clock for this unit at NORMAL. SLAVE units must have their clock set at SSM.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (CLOCK-Normal Mode) ===15:16:51 03/24/2006

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Master_Clk Source : INTERNAL

Second_Clk Source : INTERNAL
Current Clock : MASTER_CLK
Clk_Recover_Mode : MANUAL
Clock Status : NORMAL
Ext. Clock Type : E1

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

The clocks on the SLAVE units will be set up as shown in the screen below.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (CLOCK-SSM Mode) === 15:19:39 03/24/2006
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

First Clock Source : SLOT_1 P1

Second Clock Source : SLOT_1 P2
Third Clock Source : NONE
Current Clock : FIRST_CLK
Clock Status : NORMAL

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

5. FDL (Facilities Data Link)

On the Port System Setup screen, set the FDL must be set at FDL and FRAME (must be ESF & T1.403) for
all ports in the ring (ie. Slave unit ports and Master unit ports). This setting is highlighted on the sample setup
screen below.

SLOT 5 Quad-T1 PORT 1 === Port System Setup === 10:35:03 03/06/2007
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

FRAME = ESF&T1.403
CODE = B8ZS
YEL = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLI= TRANS
CGA = NORM

CXR Page 133

12 Appendix F: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring (T1) QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

OOS = BUSY
INBAND = OFF
IDLE = FF
INTF = LONG HAUL
LBO = 0 dB
FDL = FDL
Protected = DISABLE
Master = ****

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

6. TSI Function

The TSI function for all the QX3440 devices must be set at 1: N (Multicast).
This setting is highlighted on the sample setup screen below.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (SYSTEM) === 09:39:08 03/08/2013

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
[System]
Time/Date : 09:39:08 03/08/2013
Device Name : CXR QX3440

[Network]
Mode:ROUTER
NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer
LAN :ON 010.003.023.010 255.255.000.000 Ethernet
WAN :ON 020.001.001.002 255.255.000.000 HDLC 00000001
Gateway Interface: LAN Gateway IPAddr: 000.000.000.000
Inband Uses Slot: D (or 12) Note: Slot D (or 12) port 4 can't use unframe mode!
[CONSOLE port]
Baud Rate : 38400
Data Length : 8-Bits
Stop Bit : 1-Bit
Parity : NONE
XON_XOFF : XOFF

[TSI map] [Clock]

TSI Function : 1:N (Multicast) Clock Mode : Normal
Idle Signalling: 1010

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

7 Map Setup

You must do your mapping for the Master Unit. This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. The source port
is Slot1, Port 3 and the target port is Slot1, port 1.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target Quad-T1 NON-CAS Source Quad-T1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P1 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17 3 1 d 1 2 1 3 17 d 1 2 17
T.S. : 01 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18 3 2 d 1 2 2 3 18 d 1 2 18
1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19 3 3 d 1 2 3 3 19 d 1 2 19
1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20 3 4 d 1 2 4 3 20 d 1 2 20
T.S.# : 24 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21 3 5 d 1 2 5 3 21 d 1 2 21
Clear : No 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22 3 6 d 1 2 6 3 22 d 1 2 22
d/v : d 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23 3 7 d 1 2 7 3 23 d 1 2 23
1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24 3 8 d 1 2 8 3 24 d 1 2 24
1 9 d 1 3 9 3 9 d 1 2 9
Source 1 10 d 1 3 10 3 10 d 1 2 10
Slot : 1 1 11 d 1 3 11 3 11 d 1 2 11
Port : P3 1 12 d 1 3 12 3 12 d 1 2 12
T.S. : 01 1 13 d 1 3 13 3 13 d 1 2 13
1 14 d 1 3 14 3 14 d 1 2 14
Confirm?Yes 1 15 d 1 3 15 3 15 d 1 2 15
1 16 d 1 3 16 3 16 d 1 2 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

CXR Page 134

12 Appendix F: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring (T1) QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. The source port is slot 1 port 1 and the target port is slot 1 port 2.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target Quad-T1 NON-CAS Source Quad-T1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P2 2 1 d 1 1 1 2 17 d 1 1 17 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17
T.S. : 01 2 2 d 1 1 2 2 18 d 1 1 18 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18
2 3 d 1 1 3 2 19 d 1 1 19 1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19
2 4 d 1 1 4 2 20 d 1 1 20 1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20
T.S.# : 23 2 5 d 1 1 5 2 21 d 1 1 21 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21
Clear : No 2 6 d 1 1 6 2 22 d 1 1 22 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22
d/v : d 2 7 d 1 1 7 2 23 d 1 1 23 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23
2 8 d 1 1 8 2 24 d IB 1 1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24
2 9 d 1 1 9 1 9 d 1 3 9
Source 2 10 d 1 1 10 1 10 d 1 3 10
Slot : 1 2 11 d 1 1 11 1 11 d 1 3 11
Port : P1 2 12 d 1 1 12 1 12 d 1 3 12
T.S. : 01 2 13 d 1 1 13 1 13 d 1 3 13
2 14 d 1 1 14 1 14 d 1 3 14
Confirm?Yes 2 15 d 1 1 15 1 15 d 1 3 15
2 16 d 1 1 16 1 16 d 1 3 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. The source port is slot 1 port 2 and the target port is slot 1 port 3.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target Quad-T1 NON-CAS Source Quad-T1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P3 3 1 d 1 2 1 3 17 d 1 2 17 2 1 d 1 1 1 2 17 d 1 1 17
T.S. : 01 3 2 d 1 2 2 3 18 d 1 2 18 2 2 d 1 1 2 2 18 d 1 1 18
3 3 d 1 2 3 3 19 d 1 2 19 2 3 d 1 1 3 2 19 d 1 1 19
3 4 d 1 2 4 3 20 d 1 2 20 2 4 d 1 1 4 2 20 d 1 1 20
T.S.# : 24 3 5 d 1 2 5 3 21 d 1 2 21 2 5 d 1 1 5 2 21 d 1 1 21
Clear : No 3 6 d 1 2 6 3 22 d 1 2 22 2 6 d 1 1 6 2 22 d 1 1 22
d/v : d 3 7 d 1 2 7 3 23 d 1 2 23 2 7 d 1 1 7 2 23 d 1 1 23
3 8 d 1 2 8 3 24 d 1 2 24 2 8 d 1 1 8 2 24 d IB 1
3 9 d 1 2 9 2 9 d 1 1 9
Source 3 10 d 1 2 10 2 10 d 1 1 10
Slot : 1 3 11 d 1 2 11 2 11 d 1 1 11
Port : P2 3 12 d 1 2 12 2 12 d 1 1 12
T.S. : 01 3 13 d 1 2 13 2 13 d 1 1 13
3 14 d 1 2 14 2 14 d 1 1 14
Confirm?Yes 3 15 d 1 2 15 2 15 d 1 1 15
3 16 d 1 2 16 2 16 d 1 1 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. Note that this map sets up the HDLC Inband Management
mapping.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (MAP) === 15:20:40 03/24/2006

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target In-Band Source Quad-T1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : IB ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : 1 d 1 1 24 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17
T.S. : 01 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18
1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19
1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20
T.S.# : 01 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21
Clear : No 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22
d/v : d 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23
1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24
1 9 d 1 3 9

CXR Page 135

12 Appendix F: Setting up an QX3440 PDH Shared Protection Ring (T1) QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Source 1 10 d 1 3 10
Slot : 1 1 11 d 1 3 11
Port : P1 1 12 d 1 3 12
T.S. : 24 1 13 d 1 3 13
1 14 d 1 3 14
Confirm?Yes 1 15 d 1 3 15
1 16 d 1 3 16

<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>

8. Ring Enabling

From the Master Unit QX3440 Controller Setup screen press R to set up PDH Ring Protection.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 == = C o nt r ol ler Setup === 10:37:14 03/08/2013

[S Y ST E M] [MAP]
A - > S ys t e m C - > TSI Map Setup
S - > S NM P Se t up D - > Select a New TSI Map
B - > P as s w or d E - > Copy a TSI Map to Another
H - > T EL N E T/ S SH S e tu p F - > Clear a TSI Map
I - > U ni t In i t/C l e ar

[P R OT E CT I O N] [OTHER]
G - > L in k Ba c kup F un c ti o n L - > Command Line
Q - > Q DS 1 1: 1 Pr o t ec t io n N - > SNTP Setup
K - > D S0 - S NC P Se t u p U - > SYSLOG Setup
R - > P DH R in g Pr o t ec t io n P - > Power Setup
T - > P DH R in g Di a g no s ti c V - > RADIUS Setup
M - > I nb a n d P rot e c ti o n

<< Pr e ss ES C ke y to re tur n to M a in M e nu or e nte r a c omm a nd >>

The PDH Ring Protection screen will appear.

Under normal operating conditions, Alarm Filtering happens first due to alarm the system then switches to "ring
protection" mode. After that Switching Interval determines when to switch back to normal.

CXR QX3440 === PDH Ring Protection === 18:10:53 02/16/2012

ARROW KEYS: Cursor move; Change options by TAB, or by typing
PDH Ring Protection: ENABLE Ring Station : MASTER
Switching Interval : 05 Alarm Filtering: 030
Slot(Model) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
============== ======= ======= ======= =======
C ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
D ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
1 (Quad T1 ) ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE
2 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
3 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
4 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
5 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
6 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
7 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
8 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
9 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
10 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
11 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
12 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

You must now repeat steps 7 and 8 for each of the QX3440 Slave units in order to complete the PDH Shared
Protection Ring setup procedure.

CXR Page 136

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup

This chapter provides procedures for building a DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Ring with QX3440-CHAJ
units and 3E1 cards. Please refer to 3E1 plug-in manual for detail info.

Note: Both QX3440-CHAJ and CHCJ units can be applied on 3E1 DS0-SNCP circuit level protection setup.

13.1 Physical Requirements

The physical configuration of a DS0-SNCP circuit level protection ring should consist of at least two QX3440
units, two of which serve as interconnected units and one as an intermediate unit. The units are connected by
E1 lines. To ensure link diversity, the east and west E1 line is recommended to exit the same unit at the ports
of different 3E1 card.

On each QX3440 unit will be a primary path and a secondary path (detailed setup procedure is described in the
following section). Both primary and secondary paths are used to protect either a data or voice interface.
Below is the detailed list for applicable interface for 3E1 protection:

Data Interface E1,T1, Mini Quad E1, E1/T1 ATM Frame Relay, Router, FOM, TS,
DTE, G.shdsl, dry contact, C37.94, RS232, TDMoE
Voice Interface E&M, FXS, FXO, Magneto, QE&M, QFXS, QFXO

Note 1: For DS0-SNCP circuit level protection setup, the 3E1 card is only applicable on QX3440 unit version J
(CHAJ) and controller software version 8.02.01 and up.

Note 2: A maximum of ninety-three DS0-SNCP circuit level protection rings can be set in QX3440 chassis (31
DS0x3).

The illustration below is a sample application of a DS0-SNCP circuit level protection ring, and also the physical
topology that corresponds to the setup procedure in the next section.

CXR Page 137

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Interconnected Unit

Slot C

Protected Interface
(Voice or Data)
Slot 7 Slot 8
3E1 3E1

Port 2 Port 2

Port 1 Port 1
Device A
Primary Secondary

3E1
Slot 2
Port 1

Device C Iintermediate Unit

3E1

Slot 3
Port 1

3E1 Device B 3E1

Port 1 Port 1

Port 2 Port 2

Slot 2 Protected Interface Slot 1

(Voice or Data)
Primary Secondary
Slot C

Interconnected Unit

Note: The physical configuration of a DS0-SNCP circuit level protection ring should consist of at least two
QX3440 units, the intermediate unit only passes E1 signal.
Figure 13-1 Sample Application for 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Ring Setup

CXR Page 138

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

13.2 Setup Procedures

1. Clock Setup

Press (K) from the main menu to access Clock Source Setup. Choose a connected 3E1 port as the master
clock source and the other 3E1 port as the secondary clock source. When the master clock source is lost, the
clock source will automatically switch to the secondary. If the secondary is also lost, the internal clock will take
over.

The function of the Clock Holdover Mode is to use stored data to maintain clock accuracy when the master
clock loses its controlling input. In our example, Device A should be Internal clock, and Device B and C should
be in Clock Holdover Mode. The master clock source for device B is Slot 2, port2, and for C device is Slot 3 port
1. Below is a setup sample for Device B.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (CLOCK-Normal Mode) === 14:44:20 10/15/2010
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Master_Clk Source : SLOT_2 P2 Clock Hold-Over: ON

Second_Clk Source : SLOT_1 P2
Current Clock : MASTER_CLK
Clk_Recover_Mode : AUTO
Clock Status : NORMAL
Ext. Clock Type : E1(75ohm)
Dual External Clock Protection : Disable

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

2. Building Cross-Connections

First, build cross-connections for the interconnected units: Device A and Device B. For Device A, follow the
command path: main menu> (S) System Setup > (K) DS0-SNCP setup. On the screen of DS0-SNCP Setup,
choose “ENABLE” for DS0-SNCP, and “Create” for Action. Then, press ENTER for detailed configuration
setup.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Setup === 14:20:45 10/15/2010

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE
Using Map: MAP_1
Action : Create

<< ESC key ignore and return, ENTER key accept change >>

On the screen of DS0-SNCP Creation, choose the protected interface by selecting the slot and port where the
desired interface locates. Then, key in the desired T.S (timeslot) and count (the amount of the timeslot). The
total timeslot number for the protected slot will show up in dot format as
[...............................], and the location of the alphabet “P” (protected) indicates the
timeslot number that is occupied by the currently working DS0-SNCP ring. Same procedures should be used
on setting up the primary and secondary timeslot on 3E1 cards. Note that the T.S for the primary and
secondary slot should be the same. As the sample screen shows, the number in the T.S column for primary
and secondary are both “1”.

On the sample screen below, we choose E1 as the protected interface, port 1 of the 3E1 card in slot 7 as
primary, and port 1 of the 3E1 card in slot 8 as secondary. The total timeslot number is 31. The working (W)
DS0-SNCP occupies timeslot 1 of both primary and secondary 3E1 cards. The location of “P” (protected) and
“W” (working) indicates the occupied timeslot number for the DS0-SNCP circuit. To create more DS0-SNCP
circuits on other timeslots, go to the TSI Map Setup (command path: Main Menu > (S) System Setup > (C) TSI
Map Setup) and choose other timeslots for DS0-SNCP.

CXR Page 139

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

When alarms (LOS, LOF, and AIS.INS) occur in the primary slot, the working timeslot may switch from the
primary to the secondary slot. If you wish the system to switch the working timeslot from secondary back to
primary once the primary slot is repaired, select “revertible” for switch mode. If not, choose “Non-revertible”.
After all setup procedures are done, select “Yes” to confirm with the settings. The same setup procedure
should be applied to Device B.

Note: P= Protected, W= Working, S= Standby

When the protected interface is a data card:

Below is a sample screen of DS0-SNCP setup with a protected data interface: E1 card. A DS0-SNCP circuit is
created on timeslot 1.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Creation === 14:38:39 10/15/2010

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Protection Group Creation, Using map 1 Total DS0-SNCP: 1

==============================================================================
Protected Slot: D (E1 ) [.P..............................]
Port: NON-CAS
T.S.:01
Count:01

Primary Slot: 7 (3E1 ) [.W..............................]

Port:P1 NON-CAS Protection Delay: 00
T.S.:01 Upstream Send AIS: On

Secondary Slot: 8 (3E1 ) [.S..............................]

Port:P1 NON-CAS Protection Delay: 00
T.S.:01 Upstream Send AIS: On

Switch Mode :Non-revertible

Data/Voice :Data
Confirm :Yes

<< ESC key ignore and return, ENTER key accept change >>

If you create another DS0-SNCP circuit on timeslot 10 and press Yes to confirm, the screen will show as below:

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Creation === 14:38:39 10/15/2010

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Protection Group Creation, Using map 1 Total DS0-SNCP: 2

==============================================================================
Protected Slot: C (E1 ) [.P..............................]
Port: NON-CAS
T.S.:01
Count:01

Primary Slot: 7 (3E1 ) [.W.......W......................]

Port:P1 NON-CAS Protection Delay: 00
T.S.:10 Upstream Send AIS: On

Secondary Slot: 8 (3E1 ) [.S........S.....................]

Port:P1 NON-CAS Protection Delay: 00
T.S.:10 Upstream Send AIS: On

Switch Mode :Non-revertible

Data/Voice :Data
Confirm :Yes

<< ESC key ignore and return, ENTER key accept change >>

CXR Page 140

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

When the protected interface is a voice card:

Below is a sample screen of DS0-SNCP setup with a protected voice interface: FXS card. A DS0-SNCP circuit
is created on timeslot 1. Note that for voice interface, the timeslot number starts from timeslot 01, not timeslot
00.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Creation === 10:36:02 11/26/2010

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Protection Group Creation, Using map 1 Total DS0-SNCP: 1

==============================================================================
Protected Slot: 9 ( FXS ) [P...............................]
Port:P1
T.S.:01
Count:01

Primary Slot: 7 ( 3E1 ) [.W..............................]

Port:P1 CAS Protection Delay: 00
T.S.:01 Upstream Send AIS: On

Secondary Slot: 8 ( 3E1 ) [.S..............................]

Port:P1 CAS Protection Delay: 00
T.S.:01 Upstream Send AIS: On

Switch Mode :Non-revertible

Data/Voice :Voice
Confirm :Yes

<< ESC key ignore and return, ENTER key accept change >>

If you create another DS0-SNCP circuit on timeslot 02 and press Yes to confirm, the screen will show as below:

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Creation === 10:36:02 11/26/2010

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Protection Group Creation, Using map 1 Total DS0-SNCP: 2

==============================================================================
Protected Slot: 9 ( FXS ) [PP..............................]
Port:P2
T.S.:02
Count:01

Primary Slot: 7 ( 3E1 ) [.WW.............................]

Port:P1 CAS Protection Delay: 00
T.S.:02 Upstream Send AIS: On

Secondary Slot: 8 ( 3E1 ) [.SS.............................]

Port:P1 CAS Protection Delay: 00
T.S.:02 Upstream Send AIS: On

Switch Mode :Non-revertible

Data/Voice :Voice
Confirm :Yes

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Second, build a bypass connection for the intermediate unit: Device C. Follow the command: Main Menu > (S)
System Setup > (C) TSI Map Setup. Access the TSI Map setup, select the desired slot and port number for the
mapping target. Next, select the starting timeslot number (T.S) and the timeslot amount (T.S #), and data or
voice mode (d/v) for the target. Also select the desired slot, port and starting timeslot number (T.S) for the
mapping source. After setup, select “Yes” for confirmation.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (MAP) === 18:33:28 11/18/2010

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target 3E1 NON-CAS Source 3E1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 2 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P1 1 1 d 3 1 1 17 d 1 1 d 2 1 1 17 d

CXR Page 141

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d 2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d 3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d 4 d 20 d
T.S.# : 01 5 d 21 d 5 d 21 d
Clear : No 6 d 22 d 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d 9 d 25 d
Source 10 d 26 d 10 d 26 d
Slot : 3 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d
Port : P1 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d
Confirm?Yes 15 d 31 d 15 d 31 d

To create another DS0-SNCP circuit on timeslot 10, go over the same procedure again and set T.S. to “10”.
Then, select “Yes” to confirm.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (MAP) === 18:33:28 11/18/2010

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
MAP NO: MAP_1
Target 3E1 NON-CAS Source 3E1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 2 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P1 1 1 d 3 1 1 17 d 1 1 d 2 1 1 17 d
T.S. : 10 2 d 18 d 2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d 3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d 4 d 20 d
T.S.# : 01 5 d 21 d 5 d 21 d
Clear : No 6 d 22 d 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d 9 d 25 d
Source 10 d 3 1 10 26 d 10 d 2 1 10 26 d
Slot : 3 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d
Port : P1 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 10 13 d 29 d 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d
Confirm?Yes 15 d 31 d 15 d 31 d

Then, go back to the previous layer and select “(D) Select a New TSI Map” for bypass activation.

CXR QX3440 === System Setup (New map) === 15:01:22 11/15/2010
ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Last activated TSI Map: MAP_1

Change to TSI Map : MAP_1

[TSI Map] switch start hr/min

Map1 DISABLE 00:00
Map2 DISABLE 00:00
Map3 DISABLE 00:00
Map4 DISABLE 00:00

<< Press ESC to return to previous menu >>

Use MAP1 only for DS0-ANCP application. On the “Select a New TSI map” screen, select Map 1 for TSI map.

Note: For DS0-SNCP setup, the map number should always be Map 1(default configuration).

3. Diagnosis

To diagnose the DS0-SNCP circuit level protection rings, access DS0-SNCP Setup through the command path:
main menu > (S) System Setup > (K) DS0 SNCP Setup. Select “Status” for Action and press ENTER.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Setup === 16:15:14 10/15/2010

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

CXR Page 142

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE
Using Map: MAP_1
Action : Status

<< ESC key ignore and return, ENTER key accept change >>

The following screen will show up. The index shows the currently built DS0-SNCP circuit and their detailed
information. You can use the commands listed at the bottom of the screen to make diagnosis on each
DS0-SNCP circuit.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Information === 16:19:38 10/15/2010

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE Total DS0-SNCP: 2

Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode

Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================
1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Non-revertible
2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non-revertible

ESC:return, SPACE:next page, D:delete, F:force switch, M:change mode

L:lock on working, P:lock on primary, S:lock on secondary, U:unlock

 ESC: Return to the previous page

 SPACE: Go to the next page for more DS0-SNCP information
 Delete: Delete a DS0-SNCP ring from the index.

Press D on the screen of DS0-SNCP information. A prompt message will ask you to choose the SNCP circuit
you would like to delete. If you want to delete one circuit, key in the circuit’s index number in both “from” and “to”
columns as the example below. Then, press Enter and select Yes for “confirm to do”.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Information === 16:19:38 10/15/2010

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE Total DS0-SNCP: 2

Delete Index From:1 To 1__ Confirm To Do? Yes
Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode
Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================
1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Non-revertible
2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non-revertible

The circuit you choose to delete will be cleared from the index:

Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode

Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================
1 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non-revertible

To delete the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether, key-in the first index number in the
“from” column, and the last index number in the “to” column. In the example below, we key-in “Delete index
from 1 to 2, which means to delete index 1 and 2 altogether. Then, press Enter and select “Yes” for “confirm to
do.”

Delete Index From:1 To 2__ Confirm To Do? Yes

Both SNCP circuits for index 1 and 2 will be cleared.

CXR Page 143

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Information === 16:19:38 10/15/2010

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE Total DS0-SNCP: 2

Delete Index From:1 To 1__ Confirm To Do? Yes
Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode
Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================

ESC:return, SPACE:next page, D:delete, F:force switch, M:change mode

L:lock on working, P:lock on primary, S:lock on secondary, U:unlock

Note: The by-pass XC in intermediate unit should be deleted.

 Force Switch:

Switch the working timeslot between the primary (working) and the secondary (stand-by).
Press F on the screen of DS0-SNCP information. A prompt message will ask you which SNCP circuit you
would like to switch the working timeslot. Key-in the desired circuit’s index number. Then, press ENTER and
choose Yes for “Confirm to do”.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Information === 16:19:38 10/15/2010

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE Total DS0-SNCP: 2

Force Switch (to Other) Index From:1 To 1 Confirm To Do? Yes
Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode
Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================
1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Non-revertible
2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non-revertible

The working timeslot will then switch from the original one to the other. In the sample screen, the original
working timeslot for index 1 circuit is “Primary”. Once it has been force switched, the working timeslot will
switch to “Secondary”. The working timeslot is indicated by the “W” mark beside the slot number.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Information === 16:19:38 10/15/2010

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE Total DS0-SNCP: 2

Force Switch (to Other) Index From:1 To 1 Confirm To Do? Yes
Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode
Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================
1 D 01 7 1 01 W8 1 01 D Non-revertible
2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non-revertible

To force switch the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether, key-in the first index number in
the “from” column, and the last index number in the “to” column.

 Change Mode: Change the DS0-SNCP circuit level protection mode between revertible and
non-revertible

Press M on the screen of DS0-SNCP information. A prompt message will ask you which SNCP circuit you
would like to switch the mode. Key in the circuit’s index number and press Enter. Then, select “Yes” for
“Confirm to do”.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Information === 16:19:38 10/15/2010

CXR Page 144

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE Total DS0-SNCP: 2

Force Switch (to Other) Index From:1 To 1 Confirm To Do? Yes
Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode
Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================
1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Non-revertible
2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non-revertible

The circuit you choose will switch from the original mode to the other (Non-revertible to revertible, or vise
versa). In the sample screen, the original mode for index 1 circuit is “Non-revertible”. After we activate “Change
Mode” for the circuit of index 1, its mode will change to Revertible.

Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode

Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================
1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Revertible
2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non-revertible

To change the mode of a continuous order of index number altogether, key-in the first index number in the
“from” column, and the last index number in the “to” column.

 Lock on Working: Lock the data path on the working slot and port

Press L on the screen of DS0-SNCP information. A prompt message will ask you to select the SNCP circuit
which you would like to lock on its currently working timeslot. Key in the circuit’s index number and press Enter.
Then, select “Yes” for “Confirm to do”.

The working timeslot will then be locked and will not switch automatically. The locked circuit will also change its
mode to “Lock”.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Information === 16:19:38 10/15/2010

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE Total DS0-SNCP: 2

Force Lock on working - Index From:1 To 1 Confirm To Do? Yes
Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode
Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================
1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Lock
2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non-revertible

To activate “Lock on Working” on the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether, key-in the
first index number in the “from” column, and the last index number in the “to” column.

 Lock on Primary: Lock the data path on the primary timeslot

Press P from the screen of DS0-SNCP information. A prompt message will ask you to select the SNCP circuit
which you would like to lock the primary timeslot as the working timeslot. Key in the circuit’s index number and
press Enter. Then, select “Yes” for “Confirm to do”.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Information === 16:19:38 10/15/2010

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE Total DS0-SNCP: 2

Force Lock on working - Index From:1 To 1 Confirm To Do? Yes
Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode
Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================
1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Non-revertible
2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non-revertible

CXR Page 145

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

The working timeslot will then be locked in the primary slot and port, and will not switch automatically. The
locked circuit will also change its mode to “Lock”.

Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode

Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================
1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Lock
2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non-revertible

To activate “Lock on Primary” on the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether, key-in the first
index number in the “from” column, and the last index number in the “to” column.

 Lock on Secondary: Lock the data path on the secondary timeslot

Press S from the screen of DS0-SNCP information. A prompt message will ask you to select the SNCP circuit
which you would like to lock the secondary timeslot as the working timeslot. Key in the circuit’s index number
and press Enter. Then, select “Yes” for “Confirm to do”.

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Information === 16:19:38 10/15/2010

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE Total DS0-SNCP: 2

Force Lock on working - Index From:1 To 1 Confirm To Do? Yes
Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode
Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================
1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Non-revertible
2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non-revertible

The working timeslot will then be locked on the secondary slot and port, and will not switch automatically. The
locked circuit will also change its mode to “lock”.

Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode

Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================
1 D 01 7 1 01 W 8 1 01 D Lock
2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non-revertible

To activate “Lock on Primary” on the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether, key-in the first
index number in the “from” column, and the last index number in the “to” column.

 Unlock: Unlock the locked timeslot

4. Bit Error Rate Test

BERT (Bit Error Rate Test) is used to diagnose channel connection with predetermined stress patterns. You can
use BERT at one end with a loopback at the remote end, or in pairs with one at either end of a transmission link.
The loopback test can be set by using hardware loopback or software loopback (command path: 3E1 Unit
Menu> (L) Unit Loopback Setup).

The example below shows the setup procedure of BERT at Device A with a loopback at Device B.

CXR Page 146

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Device A
Interconnected Unit

Slot C

Protected Interface
(Data)
Slot 7 Slot 8
3E1 3E1

Port 2 Port 2

Port 1 Port 1

Primary Secondary

3E1 3E1

Port 1 Port 1

Port 2 Port 2

Slot 2 Protected Interface Slot 1

(Data)
Primary Secondary
Slot C

Device B
Interconnected Unit

BERT

Loopback Test
Figure 13-2 Application for BERT and Loopback Diagnosis
First, lock the data path between the E1 card (protected interface) of Device A to the E1 card (protected
interface) of Device B. On both devices, access DS0-SNCP setup and use the command “Lock on Primary” to
lock the data path. (Command Path: Controller Menu> (K) DS0-SNCP Setup> Action: Status).

On Device A, lock the primary data path with the protected E1 card at slot C:

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Information === 14:32:28 11/19/2010

Please Input decimal number (1~2), BACKSPACE to edit
DS0-SNCP : ENABLE Total DS0-SNCP: 2
Force Lock on primary - Index From:1 To 1__ Confirm To Do? Yes

Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode

Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
===================================================================
1 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Lock
2 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Non-revertible

ESC:return, SPACE:next page, D:delete, F:force switch, M:change mode

CXR Page 147

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

On Device B, lock the primary data path with the protected E1 card at slot C:

CXR QX3440 === DS0-SNCP Information === 14:51:28 11/19/2010

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS
DS0-SNCP : ENABLE Total DS0-SNCP: 1
Force Lock on primary - Index From:1 To 1 Confirm To Do? Yes

Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode

Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
===================================================================
1 C 01 W 2 2 01 1 2 01 D Lock

ESC:return, SPACE:next page, D:delete, F:force switch, M:change mode

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Second, access the 3E1 port menu of Device B. Choose (L) Unit Loopback Setup from the 3E1 port menu.
Select “LOCAL” (local loopback) for Near-end Loopback and press ENTER.

SLOT 2 3-E1 PORT 1 === Port Loopback Test === 15:45:49 11/19/2010
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT

- NEAR-END LOOPBACK : OFF *LOCAL PLB LLB

- SEND LOOPBACK ACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:

*PAYLOAD LINE
- SEND LOOPBACK DEACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:
*PAYLOAD LINE
- SEND TEST PATTERN:
*OFF PRBS-FULL

- STATUS:

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Third, go back to Device A and activate Bit Error Test. Follow the command path: Main Menu> (T) Bit Error
Test to access BERT test. The function of each configuration is listed below.

CXR QX3440 === BERT Test === 15:41:19 11/08/2010

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

Test Slot : C ( FE1 )

Test Port : 01
Pattern Type : 2exp20-1
Split Mode : Send AIS
Test Channel : Mapped
Test Map : i1iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
Test Direct : To-MAP
User Pattern : 01011101
Period(sec) : 0000000
Test Enable : DISABLE

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

Test Slot/ Test Port: Select the protected slot and port for BERT diagnosis. Our example is to use the E1 card
of Device A as the interface that sends outgoing BERT pattern. Therefore, the test slot should be the location of
the E1 card: slot C. Then, choose port one as the test port for the E1 card.

Pattern Type: The transmitted bit sequence that determines the BERT pattern. The options include: 2exp9-1,
2exp11-1, 2exp15-1 and user def (user define). When set as user def, you’ll have to set the User Pattern
according to your need.

CXR Page 148

13 Appendix G: 3E1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Setup QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Split Mode: Choose to send BERT with or without AIS (Alarm Indication Signal).

Test Channel: Choose the timeslot that you want to use for BERT diagnosis. “Mapped” means all the mapped
timeslots. “Full” means all of the timeslots. “Select” means to select the timeslot in the following “Test Map”
column.

Test Map: available for setup only when the user chooses “Select” for Test Channel. Move the cursor to select
the test channel. The screen will show the channel number you select.
Test Map : iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii CH :01

Test Direction: BERT direction that determines the testing path. Choose “To Line” to make BERT goes
straight from the testing timeslot to the selected interface. Choose “To Mapped” to make BERT goes from the
testing timeslot to the cross connect, than to the mapped interface.

Period: Period is the testing time duration for the BERT diagnosis. You can set up the testing time limit (sec.)
by yourself. The default rate is 000000 and will make the BERT diagnosis goes on forever.

Test Enable: After you have set all the parameters mentioned above, choose “Enable” to activate the BERT
test. After you enable the BERT test, the system will show the current testing status on the screen as below:
You can also inject an error to the BERT pattern using the right arrow key. If the sent out pattern is the same
with the received pattern, the channel being diagnosed is in normal condition.

Pattern: 2exp20-1 SYNC Elapsed Second: 77

Bit Error : 0 BER : 0.0
Error Seconds : 0 ESR : 0.0
SES : 0 SESR : 0.0 Pattern: 2exp20-1
SYNC

<< ESC KEY : EXIT, LEFT ARROW : RESET ERROR, RIGHT ARROW :INJECT AN ERROR >>

CXR Page 149

14 Appendix H: QX3440 Power Consumption QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

14 Appendix H: QX3440 Power Consumption

There are four types of power modules: -48 Vdc (100W), -48 Vdc (150W), -24 Vdc (150W) and -125 Vdc
(100W). The tables below list the power consumption of the controller cards and other plug-in cards. This
information is used to calculate the total power consumption and to determine if a fan tray is required or not.

Table 14-1 Power Consumption of QX3440 Plug-in cards for -48 Vdc (100W), -48 Vdc (150W) and -24 Vdc
(150W) Power Modules
Slot Plug-in cards and Fan Tray
-48 Vdc (100W) and
-24 Vdc (150W) System* Power
-48 Vdc (150W)
Power Module Consumption
Power Modules
Power Consumption Power Consumption Power Consumption
(Watt) (Watt) (Watt)
CTRL Single controller 4 4 4
1-channel E1 (Single E1 interface) 2 2 2
1-channel T1 (Single T1 interface) 2 2 2
Mini Quad E1 (Four E1 interfaces) 2 2 2
2-LAN port/32 WAN port Router 2 2 2
2-LAN port/64 WAN port Router-A 3 3 3
Mini
Fiber optical interface 2 2 2
Slot
3-channel Terminal Server 2 2 2
1-channel EIA530 2 2 2
1-channel RS232 1 1 1
1-channel V.35 1 1 1
1-channel X.21 2 2 2
4-channel E1 3 3 3
4-channel T1 3 3 3
6-channel U interface 2 2 2
10-channel U interface 3 3 3
2-channel G.SHDSL (2 pairs) w/o line 5 5 5
power
4-channel G.SHDSL (1 pair) w/o line 5 5 5
power
8-channel G.703 card at 64 Kbps data 2 2 2
rate
8-channel Dry Contact I/O 3 3 3
8-channel 2W/4W E&M 4 4 7
12-channel FXS 3 N/A 19
Single
12-channel FXO 4 4 4
Slot
12-channel Magneto 4 N/A 8
1-channel low speed optical (C37.94) 1 1 1
4-channel low speed optical (C37.94) 2 2 2
8-channel RS232 with X.50 subrate 1 1 1
6-channel V.110 Card 1 1 1
8-channel Data Bridge Card 1 1 1
8-LAN-port/ 64-WAN-port Router-B 6 6 6
3-channel E1 3 3 3
Conference Card 4 4 4
TDMoE 5.7 5.7 5.7
OCUDP 4 N/A 12
1FOM-A 2 2 2
8UDTEA 3 3 3
6-channel X.21/V.11 4 4 4
6-channel V.35 4 4 4
6-channel V.36 6 6 6
6-channel EIA530/RS449 card 6 6 6
Dual 24-channel FXS 6 N/A 38
Slot 24-channel FXO 8 8 8
2-channel G. SHDSL (2 pairs) with line 5 N/A 25
power (Fan tray required)
4-channel G. SHDSL (1 pair) with line 5 N/A 33
power (Fan tray required)

CXR Page 150

14 Appendix H: QX3440 Power Consumption QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Slot Plug-in cards and Fan Tray

-48 Vdc (100W) and
-24 Vdc (150W) System* Power
-48 Vdc (150W)
Power Module Consumption
Power Modules
Power Consumption Power Consumption Power Consumption
(Watt) (Watt) (Watt)
Fan tray 0 N/A 12
Note:
CTRL = controller, N/A = Not Applicable, W = Watt and w/o = without
*To calculate actual power consumption including power used to drive telephone and remote unit through line
power.

Condition 1:

If total power consumption of device and plug-in cards is less than 60 Watts, an additional fan try is not
required.

Number of Plug-in cards Used Power Consumption (Watt)

2 controllers @4 8
2 1-channel E1 cards @2 4
5 12-channel FXS cards @3 15
Total 27 Watts

Condition 2:

If total power consumption of device and plug-in cards is more than 60 Watts, an additional fan try is required.

Number of Plug-in cards Used Power Consumption (Watt)

2 controllers @4 8
4 1-channel E1 cards @2 8
2 4-channel E1 cards @3 6
2 Router-B cards @6 12
8 4-channel G.SHDSL w/o line power@5 40
Total 74 Watts

Condition 3 (for G.SHDSL with line power plug-in card only):

The fan try is required for all G. SHDSL cards with line power cards due to higher heat density dissipation in the
slot.

CXR Page 151

 14 Appendix H: QX3440 Power Consumption QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Table 14-2 Power Consumption of QX3440 Plug-in cards for -125 Vdc (100W) Power Module
Slot Plug-in cards and Fan Tray -125 Vdc (100W) Notes
Power Module
Power Consumption
(Watt)
CTRL Single controller 4
1-channel E1 (Single E1 interface) 2
1-channel T1 (Single T1 interface) 2
Mini Quad E1 (Four E1 interfaces) 2
2-LAN port/32 WAN port Router 2
2-LAN port/64 WAN port Router-A 3
Mini
Fiber optical interface 2
Slot
3-channel Terminal Server 2
1-channel EIA530 2
1-channel RS232 1
1-channel V.35 1
1-channel X.21 2
4-channel E1 3
4-channel T1 3
6-channel U interface 2
10-channel U interface 3
8-channel OCU-DP 12
2-channel G.SHDSL (2 pairs) w/o line power 5
4-channel G.SHDSL (1 pair) w/o line power 5
8-channel G.703 card at 64 Kbps data rate 2
8-channel Dry Contact I/O 3
8-channel 2W/4W E&M 7
12-channel FXS 19 12 channel OFF-Hook : 19 W

6 channel OFF-Hook : 12 W
Single
Slot
4 channel OFF-Hook : 10 W
12-channel FXO 4
12-channel Magneto 8
1-channel low speed optical (C37.94) 1
4-channel low speed optical (C37.94) 2
8-channel RS232 with X.50 subrate 1
8-LAN-port/ 64-WAN-port Router-B 6
3-channel E1 3
Conference Card 4
TDMoE 5.7
Data Bridge Card 1
1FOMA 2
8UDTEA 3
6-channel X.21/V.11 4
6-channel V.35 4
6-channel V.36 6
6-channel EIA530/RS449 card 6
Dual 24-channel FXS 38
Slot 24-channel FXO 8
2-channel G. SHDSL (2 pairs) with line power 25 Fan tray required
(Fan tray required)
4-channel G. SHDSL (1 pair) with line power 33 Fan tray required
(Fan tray required)
Fan tray 12 0

Note: CTRL = controller, N/A = Not Applicable, W = Watt and w/o = without

CXR Page 152

14 Appendix H: QX3440 Power Consumption QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

Power limitations determine how many plug-in cards of a particular type can be plugged into slots 1 to 12 of a
chassis. Please refer to the table below.

Plug-in card Capacity for Slots 1 to 12

Plug-in card Type Maximum. Number of Plug-in cards in Slots
1 to 12
12-channel FXS 4
8-channel OCU-DP 6
12-channel Magneto 9
8-channel 2W/4W E&M 11
4-channel G. SHDSL (1 pair) with line power 2
2-channel G. SHDSL (2 pairs) with line power 3
24-channel FXS 2
Other plug-in cards No limitations
Note: No such limitations exist for plug-in cards plugged into mini slots A to D.

Condition 1:

If total power consumption of device and plug-in cards is less than 60 Watts, an additional fan try is not
required.

Number of Plug-in cards Used Power Consumption (Watt)

2 controllers @4 8
2 1-channel E1 cards @2 4
4 12-channel FXO cards @4 16
Total 28 Watts

Condition 2:

If total power consumption of device and plug-in cards is more than 60 Watts, an additional fan try is required.

Number of Plug-in cards Used Power Consumption (Watt)

2 controllers @4 8
4 1-channel E1 cards @2 8
2 4-channel E1 cards @3 6
2 Router-B cards @6 12
5 4-channel G.SHDSL w/o line power @5 25
1 12-channel FXS card @19 19
Total 78 Watts

Condition 3 (for G.SHDSL with line power plug-in card only):

The fan try is required for all G. SHDSL cards with line power plug-in cards due to higher heat density
dissipation in the slot.

CXR Page 153

15 Appendix I: FAE Package QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

15 Appendix I: FAE Package

15.1 FAE Support

FAE package provides detailed instructions for users to send information to FAE support when they have any
problems performing operation.

Three Step Instructions:

1. Capture information
2. Upload FAE package
3. Send file back to FAE support and restart machine

1. Capture Information

The full menu path for capture information is as follows:

O > Log on
S > System Setup
L > Command Line

Type “capture” command to capture information, a sample screen is shown below.

15:10:45 Mar 10/08 >>capture

Capture FAE need information...Store...OK!

Note: If the QX3440 is stuck in a situation such as network down, the user needs to restart the computer.

2. Upload FAE Package

The full menu path for upload FAE package is as follows:

O > Log on
S > System Setup
L > Command Line

Type “fae_upload” command to upload capture information. Enter TFTP server IP to upload information. A
sample screen is shown below. Config name and FAE package name is fixed so please remember it or write it
down.

CXR QX3440 === Upload FAE package === 15:11:54 03/10/2008

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

TFTP Server IP : 10.2.1.2_______

Upload Config Name : FAE120638.cfg
Upload FAE package : FAE120638.pkg

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

CXR Page 154

15 Appendix I: FAE Package QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

CXR Q X3 4 4 0 === Upload FAE package === 15:11:54 03/10/2008

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

TFTP Server IP : 10.2.1.2

Upload Config Name : FAE120638.cfg
Upload FAE package : FAE120638.pkg
Prepare config data for upload...../
Sended 534 Blocks
15:12:44 03/10/08 Uploading Config file ...
15:13:21 03/10/08 Sent 164310 bytes in 38 seconds
15:13:21 03/10/08 Uploading FAE package ...
15:13:25 03/10/08 Sent 273772 bytes in 5 seconds

<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>

3. Send File to FAE Support and Restart Machine

The full menu path is as follows:

O > Log on
S > System Setup
L > Command Line

Type “resumes” command to restart the monitor function.

15:14:26 Mar 10/08 >>resume

Resume to monitor system process...OK!

Finally, the user needs to send two “upload FAE package” files back to FAE support. The engineer will analyze
the data first to find out the problem and fix it.

15.2 Activate iXC/8UDTE/PDH Ring

To activate iXC, 8UDTE, or PDH Ring function, three Step Instructions:

1. Inform CXR for your hardware info.

2. You will receive licence file from CXR.
3. Activate the license.

1. Inform CXR for your hardware info.

O > Log on
S > System Setup
L > Command Line
Key in hwinfo disp SLOT then press ENTER, the system will show the info you need. Copy and paste the info
shown and send to CXR representatives.

Table 15-1 Hardware Info Display Commands

Commands Description
hwinfo disp <SLOT> Display <SLOT> hardware info.
Pri PRIMARY (CONTROLLER)
Red REDUNDANT (CONTROLLER)
A~D & 1~12 SLOT A~D & 1~12
NOTE: The argument in < > should be substituted by the user.

A sample screen is as below:

CXR Page 155

15 Appendix I: FAE Package QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

1 5 : 43 : 14 Ap r 1 7 / 14 >>h w i nf o d isp pri

D i s pl a y s lo t P R I ( C ONT R O LL E R) HW info (in JSON format)
P l e as e c o py be l o w i nfo a nd pa ste on text file:
{
" pi d ": 34 4 8
" ci d ": 1
" wE x p" : " 2 01 5 - 02 - 24"
" hw l is t ": [
{
"h w sn " : " 3 14 7 58"
"h w ve r ": " Ve r .J"
}
]
}

A b o ve da t a f or H W i nfo e xp o rt .

1 5 : 43 : 19 Ap r 1 7 / 14 >>h w i nf o d isp red

D i s pl a y s lo t R E D ( C ONT R O LL E R) HW info (in JSON format)
P l e as e c o py be l o w i nfo a nd pa ste on text file:
{
" pi d ": 34 4 8
" ci d ": 1
" wE x p" : " "
" hw l is t ": [
{
"h w sn " : " 0 "
"h w ve r ": " Ve r .A"
}
]
}

A b o ve da t a f or H W i nfo e xp o rt .

1 5 : 43 : 52 Ap r 1 7 / 14 >>h w i nf o d isp 8
D i s pl a y s lo t 8 ( 8 U DTE ) H W info (in JSON format)
P l e as e c o py be l o w i nfo a nd pa ste on text file:
{
" pi d ": 34 4 8
" ci d ": 54
" wE x p" : " 2 01 5 - 04 - 21"
" hw l is t ": [
{
"h w sn " : " 3 74 4 3"
"h w ve r ": " Ve r .B"
}
]
}

A b o ve da t a f or H W i nfo e xp o rt .

Or you can: Key in hwinfo upload SLOT then press ENTER. To upload hardware info via TFTP.

Table 15-2 Hardware Info Upload Commands

Commands Description
hwinfo upload <SLOT> Upload <SLOT> hardware info.
Pri PRIMARY (CONTROLLER)
Red REDUNDANT (CONTROLLER)
A~D & 1~12 SLOT A~D & 1~12

A sample screen is as below:

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = Upload HW Info === 16:06:14 04/17/2014
A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; P l ea se Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit

U p l oa d s l ot PR I (C O NTR O L LE R ) HW info (in JSON format)

CXR Page 156

15 Appendix I: FAE Package QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

T F T P S er v er IP : 1 92 . 16 8.11.5___
T F T P S er v er IP : H WI N FO - 314758.urg

< < ES C k e y i gn o r e a nd r e tu r n, ENTER key accept change >>

2. You will receive license file from CXR.

After CXR receives your requirement as well as hardware info correctly, you will soon receive license file from
CXR.

3. Activate the license.

Follow below steps to activate the function you purchase.

O > Log on
S > System Setup
L > Command Line
Key in falicense import then press ENTER, the system will ask you to copy from license file and paste.
A successful activation screen example is as below:
1 6 : 33 : 31 Ap r 1 7 / 14 >> f a l ic e ns e import
P l e as e c o py fr o m l i cen s e f i le and paste below: (ENTER accept, ESC break)
3 J F X2 B IF G JY F FG F 4 PB I XHZ V I 5F W SB L 3U54XWARCATDN73HJOCNMCFSL55LFACXSJ2L4I3SQW2KXTZ2GE
Q 6 5 PZ I 6U K BW B 3H N 5 6K T OFM A W 6P K L3 P UGI34DEIBZG2GZMSUFSXI5YUNH7CSM5G6ZAW35I3ODXZIGSEKC
6 G O RZ Y FV F AM 3 F5 X 4 ME X 4JF Q H 3K A MS O BSKLBZKLZVTFWXBD5UVRNFLRHGGA7VZZYWRTET7PJIJFW5BZHW
7 S S OF 6 D6 2 MF 5 AK L E YO K 7BC M X 3P N EY 7 RHC6446TZ6NIBPIHQHOHRIIGBTJBJFQGZRYGWPP7FGDLY6SNUF
A 2 O GA F 3A R LF 5 K

C T R L- P ri m ar y : A c ti v ate P ri m ar y PDH- Ring. Activate Primary iXC3440 .

C T R L- S ec o nd a ry : Ac t iva t e R e du n dant P D H- Ring. Activate Redundant i X C3 4 40 .
1 6 : 34 : 24 Ap r 1 7 / 14 >>

If fail to activate the function, screen will show as below:

1 6 : 56 : 00 Ap r 1 7 / 14 >> f a l ic e ns e import
P l e as e c o py fr o m l i cen s e f i le and paste below: (ENTER accept, ESC break)
N A M 34 4
E n t er ch a rs to o le s s
1 6 : 56 : 13 Ap r 1 7 / 14 >>f a l ic e ns e import
P l e as e c o py fr o m l i cen s e f i le and paste below: (ENTER accept, ESC break)
A S D AK V JH A FR Q WP O W ER U WIT U H WK M SL K J
D e c od i ng fa i l! F il e ma y co n ta i n unrecognized chars!

Or, you may key in falicense download then press ENTER, in order to download license file via TFTP.

C X R Q X 34 4 0 = = = D o wn l oad License File === 16:57:33 04/17/2014

A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; B A CK S PACE to edit, ESC to abort

T F T P S er v er IP : 1 92 . 16 8 .11.5
D o w nl o ad Fi l e N a me : t es t .1 . enc

CXR Page 157

15 Appendix I: FAE Package QX3440 Access DCS-MUX

1 6: 5 7 :4 3 04 / 1 7/ 1 4 Downloading ..... Received 0 Blocks

1 6: 5 7 :4 3 04 / 1 7/ 1 4 Received 333 bytes
1 6: 5 7 :4 3 04 / 1 7/ 1 4 Processing...

C T R L- P ri m ar y : A c ti v ate P ri m ar y PDH - R ing. Activate Primary iXC 344 0 .

C T R L- S ec o nd a ry : Ac t iva t e R e du n dant P D H- Ring. Activate Redundant i X C3 4 40 .

< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o co n t in u e > >

Note: Go to Controller Menu > (C) Controller Configuration > (S) Activation Status for more info.

CXR Page 158